DCN Next Generation. Installation and User Instructions Digital Congress Network

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "DCN Next Generation. Installation and User Instructions Digital Congress Network"

Transcription

1 DCN Next Generation en Installation and User Instructions Digital Congress Network

2

3 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Important Safeguards en 3 Important Safeguards Before you install or operate the DCN Next Generation digital congress network, you must read the Important Safety Instructions. The Important Safety Instructions are supplied together with the central control unit.

4 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Disclaimers en 4 Disclaimers CobraNet is a trademark of Peak Audio a division of Cirrus Logic, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

5 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions About this manual en 5 About this manual Function The Installation and User Instructions gives the installers and the operators the necessary data to install, configure and operate the DCN Next Generation digital congress network. Digital version The Installation and User Instructions is available as a digital file (Portable Document File, PDF). When the PDF refers you to a location that contains more data, you can click the text to go there. The text contains hyperlinks. Precautions and notes The Installation and User Instructions uses precautions and notes. The precaution gives the effect if you do not obey the instructions. These are the types: A note gives more data. Caution If you do not obey the caution, you can cause damage to the equipment. Warning If you do not obey the warning, you can cause personal injury or death. Signs The Installation and User Instructions shows each precaution with a sign. The sign shows the effect if you do not obey the instruction. Precaution General sign for cautions and warnings. Precaution Risk of electric shock. Precaution Risk of electro-static discharges (refer to the section Electro-static discharges ). The sign that is shown along with a note gives more data about the note itself. General sign for notes. Refer to another information source.

6 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions About this manual en 6 Electro-static discharges Electro-static discharges can damage electric components. You must take measures to prevent electro-static discharges when you touch PCBs (refer to figure 1) Conversion tables Length, mass and temperature are in SI units. Refer to the data below to change SI units to imperial units. table 2: Conversion of units of length 1 in = 25.4 mm 1 mm = in 1 in = 2.54 cm 1 cm = in 1 ft = m 1 m = ft 1 mi = km 1 km = mi table 3: Conversion of units of mass 1 lb = kg 1 kg = lb table 4: Conversion of units of pressure 1 psi = hpa 1 hpa = psi 1 hpa = 1 mbar figure 1: ESD prevention table 1: ESD prevention No. Description 1 Safety isolating transformer 2 Distribution supply box 3 Conductive compartment trays 4 Electro-static voltage sensor 5 Cotton overall 6 Conductive floor mat 7 Conductive boots/heel grounding protectors 8 Conductive stool 9 Strap (resistance 0.5 to 1.0 MΩ) 10 Common reference point 11 Conductive bench top 12 Supply ground table 5: Conversion of units of temperature F = 9 -- C C = -- ( F 32) 9

7 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Table of Contents en 7 Table of Contents Important Safeguards...3 Disclaimers...4 About this manual...5 Table of Contents...7 Section 1 - System Design and Planning DCN design Introduction Calculation tool Concepts Limits Control capacity Power capacity Cable lengths Examples Interpretation devices Optical network design Introduction Calculation tool Limits Control capacity Power capacity Cabling Example layouts Wireless language distribution CobraNet User set-up Public areas Headphones/headsets Speaking distance Interpreter booths Device set-up General Cables Temperature Ventilation Cleaning Storage Acoustic feedback Technical data System electrical and electro-acoustic characteristics Environmental conditions Safety Electro-magnetic compatibility Miscellaneous Section 2 - Central Devices DCN-CCU Central Control Unit... 40

8 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Table of Contents en Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections Downloading Initialization Configuration Camera control configuration Configuration menu DCN-CCUB Basic Central Control Unit Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections Downloading Initialization Configuration Camera control configuration Configuration menu DCN-NCO Network Controller Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Downloading Installation External connections Initialization Configuration Camera control configuration Configuration menu LBB4402/00 Audio Expander Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Configuration menu PRS-4DEX4 Digital Audio Expander Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Configuration menu LBB4404/00 Cobranet Interface Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation...121

9 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Table of Contents en External connections Configuration menu CobraNet Discovery CNConfig Section 3 - Contribution Devices DCN-DIS Discussion Units Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Modes Installation External connections Operation DCN-CON Concentus Delegate Units Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections Operation DCN-CONCM Concentus Chairman Unit Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections Operation DCN-MICL, DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphones Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators External connections Operation LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset Section 4 - Flush-mounted Devices Installation Introduction Methods Recesses DCN-FPT Flush Positioning Tool DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Configuration Installation External connections DCN-FMIC Microphone Connection Panel Introduction...178

10 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Table of Contents en Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panel Introduction Control, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Operation DCN-FPRIOB Priority Panel Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Operation DCN-FLSP Loudspeaker Panel Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panel Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Operation DCN-FCS Channel Selector Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections External headphones socket Level reduction plug DCN-FVU Voting Unit Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Operation DCN-FCOUP Couple DCN-FEC End Caps DCN-TTH Tabletop Housing DCN-FBP panels Section 5 - Interpretation Devices DCN-IDESK Interpreter Desks Introduction...204

11 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Table of Contents en Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Operation Configuration Operation Section 6 - Installation Devices DCN-EPS Extension Power Supply Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections LBB4116 Extension Cables Introduction Connectors Custom-made cables LBB4119/00 DCN Connectors LBB4117/00 Cable Locking Clamps LBB4118/00 Cable Termination Plug LBB4410/00 Network Splitter Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Internal settings Installation External connections Operation LBB4414/10 Fiber Interface Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Installation External connections Operation LBB4416 Optical Network Cables Introduction Connectors Wiring Custom-made cables...239

12 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Table of Contents en Technical data LBB4417/00 Optical Network Connectors LBB4418/00 Cable-connector Tool Kit Introduction Contents Connector components Assemble the Cable-connector LBB4419/00 Cable Couplers Section 7 - Peripheral Devices DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board Introduction Controls, connectors and indicators Configuration Hall displays Signaling Remote controls Installation LBB4157/00 Chip Card Encoder Introduction Installation Operation DCN-IDCRD Chip Cards Section 8 - Troubleshooting Procedure Problems and hints Section 9 - Appendices A Audio levels B Language list C Product index...284

13 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 13 Section 1 - System Design and Planning

14 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 14 1 DCN design 1.1 Introduction The DCN Next Generation has two parts: the DCN and the optical network. This chapter tells how to design the DCN. 1.2 Calculation tool The calculation tool makes the planning and design of the DCN easier. You can find the calculation tool on the CD-ROM that is supplied with your system. 1.3 Concepts Introduction This section gives necessary data to understand the limitations in section Trunk and tap-off sockets The DCN uses two types of socket: DCN trunk sockets Use the DCN trunk sockets to make a loop-through in the trunk of the DCN. DCN tap-off sockets Use the DCN tap-off sockets to make more branches in the DCN. A DCN tap-off socket always regenerates the digital DCN signal Cables Many devices used in the DCN have a 2 m cable. If necessary the extension cable (LBB4116) can extend the device cables. 1.4 Limits Make sure these limits are not exceeded when you design the DCN: Limit 1: Control capacity The maximum number of active devices in a DCN that a central control unit can control is 245. For the maximum number of active devices that a multi CCU can control, refer to section The number of passive devices is without limit (refer to section 1.5). Limit 2: Power capacity The maximum power that one DCN socket of the central control unit can supply is 65 W. The total power that the DCN sockets of the central control unit can supply is 130 W. The maximum power that one DCN socket of the extension power supply can supply is 85 W The total power that the DCN sockets of the extension power supply can supply is 255 W. Refer to section 1.6. Limit 3: Loop-throughs The maximum number of loop-throughs in succession is 50. If there are more than 50 loop-throughs, the signal must be regenerated with a trunk splitter (LBB4114/00). Limit 4: Tap-off connections The maximum number of tap-off connections in succession between the central control unit and the last tap-off in a branch is four. If there are more than four tap-off connections in succession, the system does not operate correctly. Limit 5: Cable lengths Refer to section 1.7: With regenerative tap-offs, the maximum cable length is 250 m from the central control unit to the furthest device in any branch of the DCN. The maximum cable length from the central control unit to the first regenerative tap-off is 100 m. The maximum length of the cable between regenerative tap-offs is 100 m. Open-ended cables can cause an incorrect operation of the system. The total cable length includes the 2 m long device cables.

15 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Control capacity Active devices Active devices are devices that can: Receive data from the central control unit. Transmit data to the central control unit. Active devices must have an address (refer to section 8.7) Passive devices Passive devices can only receive data from the central control unit Overview The following table shows the active and passive devices in the DCN. table 1.1: Active and passive devices Device Type DCN-CON Active DCN-CONCS Active DCN-CONFF Active DCN-CONCM Active DCN-DDB Passive/Active DCN-DDI Active DCN-DISL Active DCN-DISS Active DCN-DISCS Active DCN-DISD Active DCN-DISDCS Active DCN-DISV Active DCN-DISVCS Active DCN-EPS Passive DCN-FCS Passive DCN-FVU Active DCN-FVU-CN Active DCN-IDESK Active LBB4114/00 Passive LBB4115/00 Passive 1.6 Power capacity Introduction Each device uses power, and most devices do not have an independent power supply Power consumption The following table shows the power each device in the DCN uses. table 1.2: Power consumption Device Watt DCN-CON 3.4 DCN-CONCS 3.7 DCN-CONFF 4.2 DCN-CONCM 4.2 DCN-DDB 2.0 DCN-DDI 4.5 DCN-DISL 2.75 DCN-DISS 2.75 DCN-DISCS 2.9 DCN-DISD 2.8 DCN-DISDCS 3.15 DCN-DISV 3.05 DCN-DISVCS 3.20 DCN-EPS 0.8 DCN-FCS 0.9 DCN-FVU 1.0 DCN-FVU-CN 1.0 DCN-IDESK 3.6 LBB4114/ LBB4115/ The power consumption of the DCN-DDI includes the power consumption of all flush-mounted devices that you can connect to it.

16 Network 1 2 Network 1 2 Network 1 2 Trunk Trunk Trunk RS 232 Port 1 RS 232 Fault OK Fault RS 232 Fault OK Fault Port 2 RS 232 Port 1 Port 2 RS 232 Port 1 RS 232 Fault OK Fault Port 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V Caution R isk of electric shock. Do not open. Avis R isk of electric shock. Do not open. Caution R isk of electric shock. Do not open. Avis R isk of electric shock. Do not open. Trunk Trunk e RS 232 RS 232 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Power supplies Introduction The devices that supply power to the DCN are the central control unit and the extension power supply (refer to figure 1.1 and figure 1.3). The power that the central control unit supplies includes the power that the optical network uses DCN-CCUB DCN-CCUB DCN-CCU P<65W DCN-CCU DCN-CCUB P<65W P<130W DCN-CCU figure 1.2: DCN power supply: DCN-CCUB DCN-EPS P<130W DCN-EPS DCN-CCU Trunk Tap-off In Out Out Out P<130W DCN-EPS P<85W Trunk Tap-off In Out Out Out figure 1.1: DCN power supply: DCN-CCU If the power taken is higher than shown in figure 1.1, an overload situation will occur (refer to section 1.6.4). P < 255 W figure 1.3: DCN power supply: DCN-EPS

17 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Overload indication Each DCN socket of the central control unit and extension power supply has a red LED that comes on to show that there is a power overload. An overload occurs when: The necessary power for the devices is greater than that is supplied. A short-circuit occurs. When an overload occurs, that socket is deactivated, and the connected devices do not operate. The socket checks every 8 seconds (DCN-CCU, DCN-CCUB) or 30 seconds (DCN-EPS) for power overloads Extension cables Extension cables (LBB4116) have a direct effect on the available power. The longer an extension cable, the less power is available to drive the connected devices. You must chose the length of the extension cables carefully (refer to section 1.7.5). 1.7 Cable lengths Maximum length The cable length between the central control unit and the furthest device from the central control unit must not be more than 250 m. The cable length includes the device cable and extension cables To first regenerative tap-off The total cable length between the central control unit and the first regenerative tap-off socket must not be more than 100 m. This includes the device cable and extension cables Between regenerative tap-offs The total cable length between two regenerative tap-off sockets must not be more than 100 m. This includes the device cables and extension cables Open-ended DCN cables Open-ended DCN cables are DCN cables of which the socket is not connected to a device in the DCN. Open-ended cables can cause the system to operate incorrectly. You can close the extension cable with a termination plug (refer to section 40). When the open-ended cable is connected to a termination plug, the system operates correctly Power correction Introduction The necessary power from a DCN socket of the central control unit and the extension power supply is affected by: The type and number of connected devices. The lengths of the connected extension cables. The power correction graph (refer to figure 1.4) corrects the power level to compensate for the extension cables Calculation To find the correction for each DCN socket of the central control unit and the extension power supply with the graph, you must first calculate: The total power consumption of the devices that are connected to the socket. Refer to section The length of the longest extension cable sequence. Refer to section

18 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Total power consumption Do as follows: 1 Find the power consumption of each device from the consumption table (refer to table 1.2). 2 Add together the power used by all the devices. The result is the total power consumption of the devices that are connected to the socket Length of the longest extension cable sequence Do as follows: 1 Add together the lengths of all extension cables in the longest sequence Graph The power correction graph (refer to figure 1.4) corrects the power level to compensate for the extension cables. Do as follows: 1 Find the total power consumption (refer to section ) on the vertical axis (Y) of the power correction graph. For example, 40 W. 2 Find the length of the longest extension cable sequence (refer to section ) on the horizontal axis (X) of the power correction graph. For example, 60 m. The intersection of both values gives the necessary power from the socket. In this example it is 53 W. For example, an extension cable of 20 m is connected directly to a DCN socket of the central control unit. To the extension cable, a trunk splitter is connected. To each tap-off socket of the trunk splitter, an extension cable is connected. One extension cable has a length of 10 m, the other extension cable has a length of 40 m. The length of the longest extension cable sequence is, in this example: = 60 m Y: Power (Watt) DCN-CCU, DCN-CCUB + DCN-EPS X: Extension cable (m) figure 1.4: Power correction graph

19 Caution Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Avis Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Trunk 1 2 RS 232 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Examples All examples use the power correction graph (refer to figure 1.4) Discussion devices DCN-CCUB m 10 m LBB4114/00 5x DCN-DIS 6x 20 m DCN-DIS LBB4114/00 6x LBB4114/00 5x DCN-DIS 10 m DCN-DIS 10 m 3x 5x DCN-DIS LBB4114/00 DCN-DIS LBB4114/00 5x DCN-DIS 3x DCN-DIS figure 1.5: Example with discussion units (DCN-DISS) table 1.3: Example with discussion units (DCN-DISS) Socket Extension cable Power for devices Corrected power Trunk 1 40 m 53.4 W 64.1 W Trunk 2 20 m 57.6 W 62.8 W

20 Network 48V V Trunk 1 2 RS 232 Port 1 RS 232 Fault NC C C NO Port 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Conference devices DCN-CCU m 10 m LBB4114/00 4x 5x 20 m DCN-CON DCN-CON LBB4114/00 5x LBB4114/00 4x DCN-CON 10 m DCN-CON 10 m 2x 4x DCN-CON LBB4114/00 DCN-CON LBB4114/00 4x DCN-CON 2x DCN-CON figure 1.6: Example with conference units (DCN-CON) table 1.4: Example with conference units (DCN-CON) Socket Extension cable Power for devices Corrected power Trunk 1 40 m 51.5 W 61.8 W Trunk 2 20 m 57.0 W 62.2 W

21 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en DCN-CCU(B) power correction table 1.5: DCN-CCU(B) power correction examples Type Extension cable Diagram Power for devices Corrected power DCN- DISS 0 m x 2.75 = W 63.3 W 23 x2m DCN- DISS 100 m LBB4116 LBB x x 1.3 = = W 1.3 W W 63.5 W 100 m 2m 13 x2m DCN- CON 0 m 19 x 3.4 = 64.6 W 64.6 W x2m DCN- CON 100 m LBB4116 LBB x x 1.3 = = 34.0 W 1.3 W W 60.5 W 100 m 2m 10 x2m DCN- CONFF 0 m 15 x 4.2 = 63.0 W 63.0 W x2m DCN- CONFF 100 m 8 x x 1.3 LBB4116 LBB = = 33.6 W 1.3 W W 59.8 W DCN- DDI 100 m 2m 8 x2m 0 m 14 x 4.5 = 63.0 W 63.0 W x2m DCN- DDI 100 m LBB4116 LBB x x 1.3 = = 36.0 W 1.3 W W 63.9 W 100 m 2m 8 x2m DCN- FCS 0 m 1 50 LBB x x 1.3 = = 63.0 W 1.3 W W 64.3 W 50x2m 2m 20x2m DCN- FCS 100 m LBB4116 LBB x x 1.3 = = 36.0 W 1.3 W W 63.9 W 100 m 2m 40 x2m

22 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning 1.9 Interpretation devices The maximum number of interpreter desks you can install in an interpreter booth is six. The figure 1.7 and figure 1.8 show two examples that use LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter and LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitters. With an LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter, you can connect the interpreter desks in series (refer to figure 1.7). If an interpreter desk becomes defective, the defective desk can have an effect on all other interpreter desks that have a connection to the same trunk. en 22 With an LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter, you can connect two interpreter desks (refer to figure 1.8). If an interpreter desk becomes defective, the defective desk has no effect on all other interpreter desks that have a connection to the same trunk. LBB4115/00 LBB4114/00 LBB4115/00 LBB4115/00 figure 1.8: Interpreter booths with LBB4115/00 figure 1.7: Interpreter booths with LBB4114/00

23 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 23 2 Optical network design 2.1 Introduction The DCN Next Generation has two parts: the DCN and the optical network. This chapter tells how to design the optical network. 2.2 Calculation tool The calculation tool makes the planning and design of the optical network easier. You can find the calculation tool on the CD-ROM that is supplied with your system. 2.3 Limits Make sure that these limits are not exceeded when you make the optical network: Limit 1: Control capacity The maximum number of nodes in the optical network is 63 (refer to section 2.4). Limit 2: Number of devices The maximum number of devices that you can connect to the optical network of the central control unit is 16. The maximum number of devices that you can connect to the network controller is determined by the control capacity. Limit 3: Power capacity The optical network sockets of the central control unit or network controller can supply the following maximum powers (also refer to section 2.5): Central control unit - total maximum power of 65 W for all sockets. Network controller - maximum power of 55 W for each socket. Limit 4: Cables Refer to section 2.6: The maximum length of a POF cable is 50 m. The maximum cable length (POF and GOF) of the optical network is dependent on the number of nodes in the optical network. The minimum bend radius of a 90 degree bend in a POF cable is 25 mm. The minimum coiling radius of a POF cable is 100 mm. 2.4 Control capacity Each device in the optical network has a number of nodes (refer to table 2.1). The maximum number of nodes in the optical network is 63. table 2.1: Nodes Device Nodes DCN-CCU 2 LBB4402/00 1 LBB4404/00 1 LBB4410/00 1 LBB4414/10 0 INT-TX04 1 INT-TX08 2 INT-TX16 4 INT-TX32 8 PRS-4DEX4 1 DCN-NCO Power capacity Introduction It is important that the devices in the optical network do not use more total power than you supply to the devices. Each device uses power and most devices do not have an independent power supply Power consumption The table 2.2 shows the power each device in the optical network uses. table 2.2: Power consumption Device Watt LBB4402/ LBB4404/ LBB4410/ LBB4414/ PRS-4DEX4 6.0 The Integrus transmitters do not use power from the system.

24 Network 1 2 Network 1 2 Network 1 2 Trunk Trunk Trunk RS 232 Port 1 RS 232 Fault OK Fault Port 2 RS 232 Port 1 RS 232 Fault OK Fault Port 2 RS 232 Port 1 RS 232 Fault OK Fault Port 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V Mains 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Power supply Introduction The devices that supply power to the optical network are: the central control unit. the network controller. If more power is necessary, you must install external power supplies in the optical network. (refer to ). The devices below can connect to external power supplies: LBB4410/00 Network Splitter (refer to chapter 41). LBB4414/10 Fiber Interface (refer to chapter 42) DCN-CCU The central control unit supplies power to: the optical network the DCN sockets. For an overview of the maximum power that the central control unit can supply refer to figure 2.1. DCN-CCU DCN-NCO If a network controller is connected, it will supply power to the optical network. In this case, the DCN-CCUs then only supply power to the DCN sockets. If a glass optical fibre is used to connect a remote CCU, this CCU then supplies the power for that part of the optical network. The maximum power that each of the optical network sockets of the network controller can supply is 55 W Overload indication Each optical network socket of the central control unit has a red LED that comes on to show that there is a power overload. An overload occurs when the necessary power for the devices is greater than that supplied. The sockets are set to off and the devices connected to the central control unit do not operate. The socket checks every 8 seconds. The network controller does not have an overload indication P<65W If only one of the optical network sockets has a power overload, the two overload LEDs come on, and the power will be removed from both sockets. DCN-CCU 2.6 Cabling DCN-CCU P<65W Introduction Many devices in the optical network have two optical network sockets that are interchangeable. You can use the two optical network sockets to make a redundant ring. The optical network uses two types of cable: Plastic Optical Fiber (POF). Glass Optical Fiber (GOF) P<130W The two optical network connectors are the same. figure 2.1: Optical network power supply: DCN-CCU

25 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Optical fiber length Because of optical attenuation, the maximum length of optical network cables (LBB4416) is 50 m. You can use GOF and fiber interfaces to increase the distance between devices to more than 50 m and less than 1500 m (refer to chapter 42). If the distance between two devices is less than 100 m, use a network splitter between devices to remove the use of fiber interfaces. Use only the trunk sockets of the network splitter in this case Cable couplers You can use the LBB4419/00 Cable Couplers to connect optical network cables to each other. A cable coupler causes optical attenuation. Each cable coupler decreases the maximum distance between two devices in the optical network (normally 50 meters) with 20 meters Maximum cable length The maximum cable length (LBB4416 and GOF) of the optical network is dependent on: The number of nodes The number of LBB4414/10 Fiber Interfaces Do as follows: 1 Find the number of nodes of each device from the node value table (refer to table 2.1). Add together the nodes of all devices. 2 With the value of step 1, use the graph (refer to figure 2.2) to find the maximum cable length without LBB4414/10 Fiber Interfaces. 3 Count the number of LBB4414/10 Fiber Interfaces. Each fiber interface decreases the maximum cable length from step 2 with 18 m. Max. cable length (m) Nodes figure 2.2: Cable correction graph

26 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Bending The minimum bend radius of a 90 degree bend in an LBB4416 cable is 110 mm (refer to figure 2.3). A 180 degree bend is the same as two 90 degree bends. R=110 mm 2.7 Example layouts Introduction The number and type of devices that make the optical network give the layout of the optical network. This chapter shows examples of the possible layouts of optical networks Basic optical network Refer to figure 2.5 for an example of a basic optical network. DCN-CCU figure 2.3: Bend radius Coiling The minimum coiling radius of an LBB4416 cable is 110 mm (refer to figure 2.4). LBB4404/00 LBB4402/00 R=110 mm PRS-4DEX4 INT-TX figure 2.5: Basic optical network figure 2.4: Coiling radius

27 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Redundant optical network The basic optical network (refer to figure 2.5) has no redundant cables. If the cable between the central control unit (DCN-CCU) and the audio expander (LBB4402/00) breaks, the central control unit cannot transmit data to the audio expander. A solution for this problem is to use a redundant cable (refer to figure 2.6) Tap-offs The network splitter (LBB4410/00) lets you make tap-offs (refer to figure 2.7). Tap-offs cannot be redundant. If the cable between the network splitter and the digital audio expander (PRS-4DEX4), becomes defective, the digital audio expander has no connection to the central control unit. DCN-CCU DCN-CCU LBB4404/00 LBB4402/00 LBB4402/00 LBB4410/00 PRS-4DEX4 INT-TX PRS-4DEX4 INT-TX figure 2.6: Redundant optical network figure 2.7: Redundant optical network with tap-off The basic system with no redundant cables has no connection between the cobranet interface (LBB4404/00) and the central control unit (DCN-CCU). A system with redundant cables has a connection between the Cobranet Interface and the central control unit. This connection makes a ring. If a cable breaks, the optical network continues to operate. The maximum total power of all devices in the redundant optical network is 65 W. If the optical network is defective near the central control unit, the other socket can supply power to all of the optical network.

28 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Multi-CCU system Refer to figure 2.8 for an example of a basic multi-ccu system. The following can be connected to a multi-ccu system: A maximum of 30 DCN-CCU devices (refer to section 2.4). A maximum of 4000 delegate positions (up to 1500 delegate positions when used in combination with a PC). DCN-NCO INT-TX DCN-CCU DCN-CCU DCN-CCU figure 2.8: Basic multi-ccu system

29 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 29 3 Wireless language distribution You can connect the system to an Integrus digital infra-red language distribution system. This system has a transmitter, radiators and receivers. Refer to the Integrus Installation and User Instructions for more data. figure 3.1: Integrus

30 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 30 4 CobraNet CobraNet is a standard for the transport of real-time digital audio and control data through an Ethernet network. A CobraNet network can transport a maximum of 64 channels of 48 khz, 20-bit audio through a 100 Mbit link connection in each direction. Many manufacturers of professional audio devices support the CobraNet standard. The DCN Next Generation digital congress network can connect to CobraNet networks with the LBB4404/00 Cobranet Interface. For example, you can use the LBB4404/00 Cobranet Interface to: Benefit from Ethernet infrastructure Transport audio signals over large distances PC data, for example data from the DCN Next Generation Open Interface can co-exist with CobraNet data on the same Ethernet network when you use managed Ethernet switches that are approved by Peak Audio. Refer to the CobraNet.info website ( for: More data about CobraNet networks. A list of approved Ethernet switches.

31 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 31 5 User set-up 5.1 Public areas Hall displays Put the hall displays in a position where users can easily see the display. Do not put the display in direct lighting or sunlight. The following has an effect on the visibility for the specified system: The distance that is necessary to see the display. The character size of the displays. Contrast and intensity of the lighting conditions. 5.3 Speaking distance The recommend speaking distance from the microphones is 0.2 m to 0.4 m. 5.4 Interpreter booths Make sure each interpreter booth has sufficient dimensions. The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) gives the specification for interpreter booths. For more data, refer to standard ISO 2603 Booths for simultaneous interpretation - General characteristics and equipment. The supplier of the hall display recommends all necessary adjustments Public areas and Walkways Keep public areas clear of system and extension cables and connections. 5.2 Headphones/headsets Put headphones and headsets with: Interpreter desks. Concentus delegate and chairman units. Channel selectors. Discussion units. Integrus receivers. Acoustic feedback between the connected headphones or headsets and the microphone occurs when: The volume level is set too high. The headphones are too close to enabled microphones. You must tell the users to keep sufficient distance from the microphones or not to set the volume level higher than is necessary. Refer to section 6.7.

32 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 32 6 Device set-up 6.1 General Caution Do not put objects on top of devices. Objects can fall through the airflow holes. A blockage of the airflow holes can cause a risk of fire. 6.4 Ventilation Keep a good airflow. Airflow holes are in the front, right and left sides of all 19-inch devices (for example, the central control unit and the audio expander). Put the devices on a hard and level surface. Put the central control unit at a minimum distance of 0.10 m from walls to let sufficient air flow. 6.5 Cleaning Caution Do not put the devices near or above a radiator, heat grill or in direct sunlight. Caution Do not cause vibration of the devices. Make sure that the area is clean. Make sure that the air is sufficiently cool. Make sure that there is sufficient lighting. 6.2 Cables Use different cable ducts for the extension and mains cables. Identify each cable with a label and divide trunks to manageable geographic locations. In public areas where people can touch or move above the connectors and cables, use metal protection covers. Refer to the applicable protection specification of the protection covers. 6.3 Temperature When devices are in a 19-inch rack, make sure there is rack space between the devices to let sufficient airflow. Forced airflow may be necessary to keep the temperature of the devices below the maximum temperature (refer to section 7.2). This extends the lifetime of the devices. Caution Do not use alcohol, ammonia or petroleum solvents or abrasive cleaners to clean the devices. 1 Disconnect the mains power supply from the devices, if you want to clean the devices. 2 Use a soft cloth that is not fully moist with a weak soap and water solution. 3 Let the device fully dry before you operate the device again. 6.6 Storage If the central control unit is stopped or disconnected from the mains power supply for more than 100 days, the values of all system parameter are erased. This includes all the values of the parameters of the interpreter desks, as well as the Software Licence code. 1 Disconnect the mains power supply from the devices, if you do not use the devices for a long time. 2 Keep the devices in a clean and dry area with a sufficient airflow.

33 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Acoustic feedback Acoustic feedback ( howling ) occurs when the sound of the loudspeakers or headphones in the system is sent to the system again by enabled microphones. table 6.1: Acoustic feedback Source Quick solution Structural solution The acoustic feedback is caused by the loudspeakers of the contribution devices. The acoustic feedback is caused by an external public address system that is connected to the DCN Next Generation digital congress network. The acoustic feedback is caused by the headphones that are connected to the contribution devices. Decrease the volume level of the system. For example, with the knob on the front of the central control unit (refer to section ). Decrease the volume level of the public address system or the DCN Next Generation digital congress network. Tell the chairmen and the delegates to decrease the volume level of their headphones with their contribution devices. Do as follows: 1 Install a feedback suppressor between audio input 2 and audio output 2 of the central control unit. 2 Set the audio routing mode of the system to Insertion (refer to section 8.8.2). Install a feedback suppressor between audio output 1 and the input of the external public address system. Install and configure the headphones level reduction of the contribution devices. (Refer to the section about the contribution devices.)

34 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 34 7 Technical data 7.1 System electrical and electro-acoustic characteristics General table 7.1: Electro-acoustic characteristics Nominal input level: 85 db SPL Overload input level: 110 db SPL Automatic gain reduction (not for PA-floor output): 24 db (interpretation channels) 12 db (delegate loudspeaker channel) Automatic gain reduction with: 3 db (2 microphones on 5 db (3 microphones on) 6 db (4 or more microphones on) Loudspeaker gain control: 24 x 1 db and off (mute) Transmission links From delegate microphone to interpreter headphones From delegate microphone to delegate headphones From interpreter microphone to delegate headphones From interpreter microphone to interpreter headphones From auxiliary input to delegate headphones From auxiliary input to interpreter headphones From delegate microphone to auxiliary output From interpreter microphone to auxiliary output table 7.2: Transmission links Frequency response: 125 Hz to 20 khz (General) 125 Hz to 3.5 khz (Intercom links) Harmonic distortion: < 0.5% Harmonic overload: < 1% Crosstalk 4 khz: > 80 db Dynamic range: > 90 db

35 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Combined devices from input to output Delegate microphone with transmission link to interpreter headphones Delegate microphone with transmission link to delegate headphones Delegate microphone with transmission link to auxiliary output table 7.3: Combined devices from input to output Typical frequency response: 125 Hz to 20 khz Front-to-random sensitivity index: > 4.6 db Rated equivalent sound pressure level due to inherent noise: < 25 db(a) Total harmonic overload: < 1% Crosstalk attenuation: > 80 db 7.2 Environmental conditions Interpreter microphone with transmission link to interpreter headphones Interpreter microphone with transmission link to delegate headphones Interpreter microphone with transmission link to auxiliary output table 7.4: Environmental conditions Working conditions: Fixed, stationary, transportable Temperature range: -20 to +70 C (transport) +5 to +45 C (operation) For EPS and contribution devices with an LCD, the maximum temperature is +40 C. Relative humidity: < 95% 7.3 Safety According Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68 EEC. For European countries: according EN Marking: CE For international countries: IEC according CB-Scheme. For North America: USA: ANSI/UL Canada: CAN/CSA no Marking c-csa-us.

36 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en Electro-magnetic compatibility table 7.5: Electromagnetic compatibility EMC compatibility: According ECM Directive 89/336/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/ECC European approvals: CE marking EMC environment: for commercial or professional use EMC emission: According harmonized standard EN (E3) (prof. audio/video equipment) According FCC rules (FCC part 15) complying to limits for class A digital devices EMC immunity: According harmonized standard EN (E3) (prof. audio/video equipment) Immune to mobile phones 7.5 Miscellaneous table 7.6: Miscellaneous Basic standard ESD: According EN Contact discharge: 4 kv and air discharge: 8 kv Basic standard mains harmonics and voltage fluctuations, flicker: According EN and EN Basic standard RF electromagnetic fields: According EN RF conducted: 150 khz - 80 MHz: 3 Vrms RF radiated MHz: 3 V/m Cellular telephone (GSM) dummy test: at 20 cm speech distance Criteria: not effecting normal operation. Magnetic immunity: Rack mounting: 50 Hz - 10 khz: A/m No rack mounting: 50 Hz - 10 khz: A/m Basic standard low energy electrical fast transients, bursts: According EN Mains: fast transients: 1 kv; signal and control data lines: 0.5 kv Basic standard high energy surges: According EN Mains: surges: 1 kv CM and 0.5 kv DM. Basic standard voltage dips, short interruptions, variations: According EN Mains: voltage dips 100% for 1 period, 60% for 5 periods, > 95% for 5 seconds. Shock resistance: According to IEC Eb Vibration resistance: According to IEC Fc, procedure A

37 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 37

38 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions System Design and Planning en 38

39 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 39 Section 2 - Central Devices

40 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 40 8 DCN-CCU Central Control Unit 8.1 Introduction The DCN-CCU Central Control Unit controls the system. The central control unit can operate with or without a control PC. The DCN-CCU-UL is the CSA/UL approved version of the DCN-CCU. The network controller and all CCUs in a multi CCU system must be switched on in order to work correctly, even if the CCUs are set to single mode. Transmitters, CCUs and network controllers must be connected to an optical network in the power off state.

41 Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Risk of electric shock. Do not open. DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the central control unit (refer to figure 8.1) contains: 1 On/off switch - Starts and stops the central control unit. 2 Display - Shows the configuration menu (refer to section 8.10). 3 Knob - Operates the configuration menu (refer to section 8.10). You can also change the volume level of the system with the knob. 4 Headphones socket - Connects headphones to the central control unit (refer to section 8.5.4) Caution Avis RS 232 Port 1 Mains RS 232 Port 2 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Network 1 2 Trunk 1 2 Fault 230 OK Fail 115: V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V figure 8.1: Front and rear views

42 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Rear view The rear of the central control unit (refer to figure 8.1) contains: 5 RS232 ports - Connect a PC, remote controllers or video cameras to the central control unit (refer to section 8.5.8). 6 Power inlet - Connects the central control unit to the mains power supply with a power cable (refer to section 8.5.1). 7 Ground screw - Connects the central control unit to ground. 8 Optical network sockets - Connect the central control unit to the optical network (refer to section 8.5.3). 9 DCN sockets - Connect the central control unit to the DCN (refer to section 8.5.2). 10 Fault contact - Connects the central control unit to devices to sense the condition of the central control unit (refer to section 8.5.7). 11 Audio inputs - Connect the central control unit to external analog audio sources (refer to section 8.5.5). The functions of the audio inputs are: Audio input 1: Floor Audio input 2: Selectable recorder/delegate loudspeaker/mix-minus/insertion (refer to section 8.8.2). 12 Audio outputs - Connect the central control unit to external analog audio devices (refer to section 8.5.6). The functions of the audio inputs are: Audio output 1: PA Audio output 2: Selectable recorder/delegate loudspeaker/mix-minus/insertion (refer to section 8.8.2). 13 Voltage selector - Selects the voltage on which the central control unit must operate (refer to section 8.5.1). 14 Fuse holder - Prevents damage to the internal power supply unit of the central control unit (refer to section 8.5.1). 8.3 Internal settings Overview Caution Before you open the central control unit, disconnect it from the mains power supply. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you. Caution Before you open the central control unit, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges. The PCBs of the central control unit (refer to figure 8.2) contain: 15 Software LEDs - Show the condition of the software of the central control unit. When the software runs correctly, the yellow LED flashes and the green LED is constantly on. 16 S600 switches - Reserved (refer to section 8.3.2). 17 X605 jumper block - Enables or disables the watchdog (refer to section 8.3.5). 18 Reset switch - Starts the central control unit again. 19 Optical network processor indicator - Comes on when the optical network processor operates correctly. 20 S500 switches - Configure the RS232 ports of the central control unit (refer to section 8.3.3). 21 X600 jumper block - Connects and disconnects the internal back-up battery of the central control unit (refer to section 8.3.4). 22 X104 jumper block - Connects and disconnects the mechanical ground and the electrical ground (refer to section 8.3.6). 23 Fuse - Prevents damage to the electronic components in the central control unit.

43 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 R15 P15 N15 M15 L15 R16 P16 N16 L16 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J8 J9 J10 J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 ON ON DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en S601 X605 S600 X14 X600 B601 B602 B604 X103 G600 X1001 B1000 X1000 F100 S800 S1000 X155 S500 X figure 8.2: Internal settings

44 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en S600 switches table 8.1: S600 switches (* = default) Switch Position Description S600-1 ON* Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. OFF S600-2 ON Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. OFF* S600-3 ON Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. OFF* S600-4 ON Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. OFF* S600-5 ON Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. OFF* S600-6 ON Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. OFF* S600-7 ON OFF* Reserved. Do not change the position of this switch. S600-8 ON OFF* Boot mode. Enables the download of new firmware (in case a download failed). Normal operation RS232 configuration Use the S500 switches to configure the RS232 ports of the central control unit (refer to table 8.2 and table 8.3). table 8.2: RS232 protocol (* = default) Protocol Port 1 Port 2 S500-1 S500-2 S500-5 S500-6 Open interface Off Off Off Off Terminal Off On Off On Full On* Off* On Off Camera control On On On* On* table 8.3: RS232 baudrate (* = default) Baudrate Port 1 Port 2 S500-3 S500-4 S500-7 S k Off Off Off Off 19.2k Off On Off* On* 57.6k On Off On Off 115.2k On* On* On On

45 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Internal back-up battery Use the X600 jumper block to connect and disconnect the internal back-up battery of the central control unit (refer to table 8.4). When your central control unit is new, you must energize the central control unit to charge the internal back-up battery. The internal back-up battery is fully charged after 24 hours. table 8.4: X600 jumper block (* = default) Jumper shunt Description 1 and 2 * Connects the internal back-up battery. When you stop the central control unit, the memory of the central control unit is not erased. 2 and 3 Disconnects the internal back-up battery. When you stop the central control unit, the memory of the central control unit is immediately erased. The memory of the central control unit contains: The license code The settings of the interpreter desks. You only have a license code when you use the system in combination with: The PC Control Software A remote controller Watchdog Use the X605 jumper to enable or disable the watchdog of the central control unit (refer to table 8.5). table 8.5: X605 jumper block (* = default) Jumper shunt Description Present The watchdog is disabled. The central control unit does not start again after an error. Not present* Enables the watchdog. The central control unit starts again after an error. When you disable the watchdog, the system can operate incorrectly Ground Use the X104 jumper block to connect and disconnect the system ground and the ground of the central control unit (refer to table 8.6). For example, you can connect the system ground and the ground of the central control unit to prevent hum. table 8.6: X104 jumper block (* = default) Jumper shunt Description 1 and 2 Connects the system ground and the ground of the central control unit. 2 and 3 * Disconnects the system ground and the ground of the central control unit. When you connect the system ground to the ground of more than one device in the system, you can create ground loops. Ground loops can cause hum.

46 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Installation Install the central control unit in a 19-inch rack system or on a flat surface. Four feet and two brackets are supplied with the central control unit (refer to figure 8.3). 8.5 External connections Power supply To connect the central control unit to a mains power supply do as follows: The DCN-CCU is configured for a voltage of V(AC). The DCN-CCU-UL is configured for a voltage of V(AC). 1 Set the voltage selector on the rear of the central control unit to the correct position (refer to table 8.8). figure 8.3: Installation table 8.7: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d), flat surface: 92 x 440 x 400 mm (without brackets, with feet) Dimensions (h x w x d), 19-inch rack system: 88 x 483 x 400 mm (with brackets, without feet) Weight: 6.7 kg (without brackets, without feet) When you install the central control unit in a 19-inch rack system, the central control unit extends 36 mm in front of the brackets. table 8.8: Voltage selector Power supply voltage Voltage selector 90 to 132 V(AC) to 264 V(AC) Make sure that the fuse holder in the rear of the central control unit contains the correct fuse (refer to table 8.9). table 8.9: Fuses Voltage selector Fuse 115 T2.5A 250 V (UL 248) 230 T2AH 250 V (IEC 60127) 3 Connect a locally approved power cable to the central control unit (refer to figure 8.4). figure 8.4: Power supply

47 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 47 4 Connect the power cable to a power supply. Caution Make sure that the mains power supply is grounded. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you Optical network Connect the trunk of the optical network to the optical network sockets of the central control unit with optical network cables (refer to figure 8.6) DCN Connect the trunk of the DCN to the DCN sockets of the central control unit (refer to figure 8.5). LED figure 8.6: Optical network LED figure 8.5: DCN Each DCN socket has a red LED that comes on if there is an overload (refer to figure 8.5 and section 2.5.4). table 8.10: DCN connection Number of connections: 2x DCN socket Location: Rear side Power supply: max. 65 W (refer to figure 1.1) Each optical network socket has a red LED that comes on if there is an overload (refer to figure 8.6 and section 2.5.4). table 8.11: Optical network connections Number of connections: 2x proprietary sockets Location: Rear side Nodes: 2 Power supply: 0 W when connected to a DCN-NCO Max. 65 W when used without a DCN-NCO (refer to figure 2.1)

48 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones socket of the central control unit. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 8.7) Audio inputs You can connect an external analog audio source to the audio inputs of the central control unit. The central control unit has two audio inputs. Each audio input has (refer to figure 8.8): 1 XLR socket for balanced signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR sockets contain transformers. 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. figure 8.7: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 8.12: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right The audio inputs change stereo signals in mono signals. 2 Audio In 1 You can also connect mono headphones to the headphones socket You can select the signal that is available on the headphones socket with the configuration menu (refer to section ). figure 8.8: Audio input, connection table 8.13: Audio input, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal in 5 Return Shield/ground

49 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 49 You can select the procedure that is used to send audio signals through the central control unit with the audio routing modes (refer to section ). You can only connect line level sources to the audio inputs of the central control unit. It is not possible to connect microphone sources. table 8.14: Audio input details, line level signals Number of connections: 1x XLR socket for each audio input 1x double cinch socket for each audio input Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level: Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: XLR: 22 kω Cinch: 12 kω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 85 max. level CMRR: > Hz > 50 1 khz Crosstalk attenuation: > 85 max. level Distortion: < db of the max. input Audio outputs You can connect an audio recording device or a public address system to the audio outputs of the central control unit. The central control unit has two audio outputs. Each audio output has (refer to figure 8.9): 1 XLR plug for balanced signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR plugs contain transformers. 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. The two cinch sockets contain the same mono signal. 1 Audio Out figure 8.9: Audio output, connection table 8.15: Audio output, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal out 5 Return Shield/Ground 5

50 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 50 You can select the procedure that is used to send audio signals through the central control unit with the available audio routing modes (refer to section ). table 8.16: Audio output details Number of connections: 1x XLR plug for each audio output 1x double cinch socket for each audio output Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level (audio output 1): Refer to appendix A Nominal level (audio output 2): Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: < 100 Ω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 89 max. level Crosstalk attenuation: > 85 max. level Distortion: < db of the max. input Fault contact Use the fault contact to send the condition of the central control unit to external devices. If the central control unit operates correctly, the OK pins are internally connected. The central control unit internally connects the Fail pins when: The central control unit is stopped. The internal power supply unit operates incorrectly. The central control unit does a reset. figure 8.10: Fault contact OK Fail table 8.17: Fault contact Number of connections: 4-pole plug Location: Rear side Signal: Potential-free change-over relay Voltage: Max. 24 V(DC), 15 V(AC) Current: Max. 500 ma

51 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en RS232 ports You can connect a PC, remote controllers or video cameras to the RS232 ports of the central control unit (refer to chapter 8.9). The central control unit has 2 RS232 ports. You can set the protocol and the baudrate of the RS232 ports with the S500 switches (refer to section 8.3.3). figure 8.11: RS232 port, connection table 8.18: RS232 port, connection Pin Definition Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Select 2 RxD Receive Data 3 TxD Transmit Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 SG Signal Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 RTS Request To Send 8 CTS Clear To Send 9 RI Ring Indicator table 8.19: RS232 ports Number of connections: 2x 9-pole SUB-D socket Location: Rear side Maximum cable length: 9600 baud: 15 m, >9600 baud: 3 m Signal levels: EIA RS232-C interface specifications Downloading To download the software do the following: 1 Install the download and license tool on a PC (the download and license tool is on the CD). 2 Connect all central equipment that you want to use in this system to the CCU. 3 Connect the PC to the CCU. 4 Set the PC communication port to serial connection. 5 Select the correct serial port and baud rate (refer to section 8.3.3) 6 Download the CCU for wired DCN. 7 Download the optical devices. For the system to work correctly, all software and firmware of the central equipment and PC must be of the same release. 8.7 Initialization Introduction Each active device in the DCN (see section 1.5.1) must have an address. The central control unit cannot send data to an active device that does not have an address. During the initialization, the central control unit gives addresses to the active devices System You must do the initialization of the system before you can use the system: It is not necessary to do an initialization when the system is re-installed in another location and contains the same devices after it is re-installed. Active devices hold their addresses. 1 Select the 7J De-init menu item of the configuration menu of the central control unit. 2 Push the knob to go to the 7J De-initialize menu item.

52 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Devices You can also do the initialization of active devices that are added to the system after you did the initialization of the system. 3 Set the value of the parameter in the menu item to Yes. The addresses of all active devices in the DCN are erased. All LEDs on all active devices in the DCN come on. Use a paperclip or similar device to push the de-init switch. Do not use a sharp object, otherwise you might damage the de-init switch. 4 Push the microphone button of each active device in the DCN. When the central control unit gives an address to the active device, the LEDs of the active device go off. Do not push more than one microphone button at the same time. The central control unit cannot give addresses to more than one active device at the same time. Push the de-init switch of the active device for less than half a second to erase the address of the active device. Push and hold the de-init switch of the active device for more than one second to erase the address and do the initialization at the same time. 8.8 Configuration Microphone modes Introduction Select the microphone mode with the 1 Mic. Mode menu item (refer also to section ). You can also set the maximum number of enabled delegate microphones. The DCN-FVU Voting Units do not have a microphone button. Push voting button 3 to give an address to a voting unit. In systems without a control PC, the maximum number of enabled chairman microphones is 15. You can also give an address to a DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface with voting button 3 of a connected DCN-FV Voting Panel.

53 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Open In the Open mode, delegates can enable their microphones with the microphone button on their contribution devices. When the maximum number of delegates speak, the next delegate that enables his or her microphone is added to a request-to-speak list. The microphone is not enabled until another delegate disables his or her microphone. Microphones of chairman devices can always be enabled in the Open mode Override In the Override mode, delegates can activate their microphones with the microphone button on their contribution device. When the maximum number of delegates speak, the next delegate that activates his or her microphone automatically deactivates the microphone that was activated for the longest time. Microphones of chairman units can always be activated in the Override mode Voice In the Voice mode, delegates can enable their microphones with their voices. The maximum number of delegates that can speak at the same time is the same as the maximum number of enabled microphones. Delegates can mute their microphones with the microphone button on their contribution devices Microphones of chairman units can always be activated in the PTT mode Audio routing modes Introduction You can set the audio routing of audio input 2 and audio output 2 with the 7G Routing I/O 2 menu item (see section ). The functions of audio input 1 and audio output 1 of the central control unit cannot be changed. The signal on audio input 1 is always added to the floor signal. The signal on audio output 1 is always suitable to connect the system to an external public address system Recorder In the Recorder mode, audio output 2 of the central control unit transmits a signal that you can connect to an external audio recorder (refer to figure 8.12). The central control unit has no effect on the volume level of the signal. In the Recorder mode, the signal on audio input 2 of the central control unit is added to the floor signal. The LED ring of the microphone (refer to section 17.4) does not come on. But, the LED of the microphone button is always on PTT In the PTT (push-to-talk) mode, the delegates can activate their microphones with the microphone button on their contribution devices. The microphone is activated as long as the microphone button is pushed. When the maximum number of delegates speak, the other delegates cannot activate their microphones.

54 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 54 C C 4< 1 C C 4< 1 O 2 2 C I C I I 2 I 2 DCN-SW + 1 DCN-SW + 1 C DCN-CCU Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices + Optical network + Chime C DCN-CCU Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices + Optical network + Chime figure 8.12: Recorder Delegate loudspeaker In the Delegate loudspeaker mode, audio output 2 of the central control unit transmits a signal that you can connect to an external public address system (refer to figure 8.13). The central control unit sets: The volume level of the signal The levels of the bass of the signal The level of the treble signal figure 8.13: Delegate loudspeaker Insertion In the Insertion mode, audio output 2 and audio input 2 of the central control unit are used to add signals from external audio devices (refer to figure 8.14). For example, you can connect an external audio mixer between audio output 2 and audio input 2 of the central control unit. In the Delegate loudspeaker mode, the signal on audio input 2 of the central control unit is added to the floor signal.

55 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 55 C C C I I 4< When you connect to a telephone coupler: Go to menu item 7G Routing I/O 2 to set the systems to the Mix minus mode. Connect audio input 2 and audio output 2 to the telephone coupler. When you connect two systems together (refer to figure 8.15) Go to menu item 7G Routing I/O 2 to set the systems in the Mix minus mode. Connect audio input 2 of the first system to audio output 2 of the second system. Connect audio output 2 of the first system to audio input 2 of the second system. DCN-SW + 1 C DCN-CCU figure 8.14: Insertion In the Insertion mode, you must install a device between audio output 2 and audio input 2 of the central control unit. When you do not install a device, the audio signals from contribution devices (floor) leave the system, but do not enter the system again Mix-minus Use the Mix-minus mode to: connect to a telephone coupler. connect two systems together. Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices + Optical network + Chime C C C I I C 4< DCN-SW DCN-CCU figure 8.15: Mix-minus + Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices + Optical network + Chime The Mix-minus connection does not cause acoustic feedback. When the distance between the two systems is great, you can use a telephone coupler to connect the two systems.

56 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Local floor Local floor is used to create directional sound. In the Local floor mode, audio output 4 of the central control unit only transmits the floor signal of the units connected to the CCU. You can connect audio output 4 to an external public address system Attention chimes The central control unit can play an attention chime when the chairman: Pushes the priority button on the chairman device. Starts a voting session. You can enable or disable attention chimes with the 7B Att. Tones menu item (refer also to section ). There are 3 different attention chimes available Erase requests-to-speak and speakers The central control unit can erase the requests-to-speak and speakers when the chairman pushes the priority button on the chairman device. You can enable or disable this function with the 7A Mic. Priority menu item (refer to section ). If you set the menu item to Permanently off, the system does not activate the microphones of the delegates again when the chairman releases the priority button. The requests-to-speak and speakers are erased. If you set the menu item to Temporarily off, the system activates the microphones of the delegates again when the chairman releases the priority button. The requests-to-speak and speakers are not erased Floor distribution The central control unit can send the floor signal to all empty channels in the system. You can enable or disable this function with the 7D Floor Distr. menu item (refer to section ). If you set the menu item to Off, the central control unit does not send the floor signal to all empty signals in the system. If you set the menu item to On, the central control unit sends the floor signal to all empty channels in the system Intercom Introduction To enable the intercom you must first identify the locations of the operator and the chairman Location of the operator To identify the location of the operator: 1 Select the 7Ea Assign menu item of the configuration menu of the central control unit. 2 Set the value of the parameter in the menu item to Yes. The display of the central control unit shows: 3 Lift the receiver of the intercom handset of the operator to identify the location of the operator. When the central control unit identifies the location, the display of the central control unit shows: Location of the chairman To identify the location of the chairman: 1 Go to the 7Eb Assign menu item of the configuration menu of the central control unit. 2 Set the value of the parameter in the menu item to Yes. The display of the central control unit shows: 3 Lift the receiver of the intercom handset of the chairman to identify the location of the chairman. When the central control unit identifies the location, the display of the central control unit shows:

57 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 57 LBB4162 Stand-alone Camera Control software module for systems without a PC. 8.9 Camera control configuration Introduction The central control unit can automatically point video cameras in the direction of the delegate or chairman that speaks. You can connect camera(s) as follows: Direct camera control in a system without a PC. Camera control through a video switcher in a system without a PC. Direct camera control in a system with a PC. Camera control through a video switcher in a system with a PC Direct camera control without a PC Overview Refer to figure 8.16 for an overview of a system with direct camera control without a PC Installation 1 Connect a video display to the video output of the AutoDome video camera. 2 Connect the LTC5136 AutoDome Controller to the AutoDome video camera. 3 Set the pre-positions of the AutoDome video camera with the AutoDome Controller. 4 Make sure that all pre-positions of the AutoDome video camera are correct. 5 Disconnect the LTC5136 AutoDome Controller from the AutoDome video camera. 6 Set the protocol for serial port 2 of the central control unit to camera control (refer to section 8.3.2). 7 Set the baudrate for serial port 2 of the central control unit to 9.6k (refer to section 8.3.2). 8 Connect the serial port of the temporary PC to the serial port 2 of the central control unit (refer to figure 8.17). Refer to section for maximum cable lengths. AutoDome 9 pole D-type (female) 9 pole D-type (male) DCN-CCU Video display 9 Install the LBB4162 stand-alone Camera Control software module in the temporary PC (refer to the DCN Next Generation Software Installation Instructions). 10 Attach the pre-positions of the AutoDome video camera to the seat numbers with the LBB4162 standfigure 8.16: Direct camera control without a PC Requirements These are the requirements for a system with direct camera control without a PC: AutoDome video camera (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video cameras). Video display (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video displays). Central control unit. Temporary PC with at least one serial port. LTC5136 Autodome Controller. DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI PC figure 8.17: PC to DCN-CCU DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU

58 ALLEGIANT Video Systeem Power Code Out Alarm Status Battery Low DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 58 alone Camera Control software module (refer to the User Manual of the LBB4162 stand-alone Camera Control software module). 11 Disconnect the temporary PC from the central control unit. 12 Connect the AutoDome video camera to the central control unit (refer to figure 8.18). 9 pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU Terminal 1 SG 2 TxD 3 RxD 4 +BP 5 -BP 6 SHLD 7 +BP 8 -BP AutoDome Video displays (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video displays). Central control unit Temporary PC with two serial ports. LBB4162 Stand-alone Camera Control software module for systems without a PC Installation 1 Set the protocol for serial port 2 to camera control (refer to section 8.3.2). 2 Set the baudrate for serial port 2 to 19.2 k (refer to section 8.3.2). 3 Connect COM 1 of the temporary PC to the central control unit that is used to control video cameras (refer to figure 8.20). Refer to section for maximum cable lengths. figure 8.18: DCN-CCU to AutoDome Video switcher without a PC Overview Refer to figure 8.19 for an overview of a system without a PC and camera control through a video switcher. Video cameras 9 pole D-type (female) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI PC pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU DCN-CCU RS232 Allegiant Video display figure 8.20: PC to DCN-CCU figure 8.19: Video switcher without a PC 4 Connect COM 2 of the temporary PC to the serial port of the Allegiant video switcher (refer to figure 8.21). The baudrate of the connection must be 19.2k Requirements These are the requirements for a system with camera control through a video switcher without a PC: Video cameras (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video cameras). Allegiant video switcher with keyboard (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video switchers).

59 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 59 9 pole D-type (female) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI pole D-type (male) SG RxD TxD CTS RTS n.c. SG n.c. n.c. When you make the cable that figure 8.22 shows, mark the ends of the cable with CCU and Allegiant. This makes sure that you connect the cable in the correct direction. When you connect the cable in the incorrect direction, the central control unit cannot send data to the Allegiant video switcher. PC figure 8.21: PC to Allegiant Allegiant 5 Connect a video display to the video output of the Allegiant video switcher. 6 Install the LBB4162 Camera Control software module in the temporary PC (refer to the DCN Next Generation Software Installation Instructions). 7 Start the LBB4162 Camera Control software module (refer to the User Manual of the LBB4162 Camera Control software module). 8 Set the pre-positions of the video cameras with the keyboard of the Allegiant video switcher. 9 Make sure that all pre-positions of all video cameras are correct. 10 Attach the pre-positions of the video cameras to the seat numbers with the LBB4162 Camera Control software module. 11 Disconnect the temporary PC from the central control unit and the Allegiant video switcher. 12 Connect the central control unit to the Allegiant video switcher (refer to figure 8.22). 9 pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU 9 pole D-type (male) SG RxD TxD CTS RTS n.c. SG n.c. n.c. Allegiant figure 8.22: Central control unit to video switcher Direct control with a PC Overview Refer to figure 8.23 for an overview of a system with direct camera control with a PC. PC Port 1 Port 2 DCN-CCU AutoDome Video display figure 8.23: Direct camera control with a PC Requirements These are the requirements for a system with direct camera control with a PC: AutoDome video camera (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video cameras). Video display (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video displays). Central control unit PC with at least one serial port. LTC5136 Autodome Controller. LBB4188 Camera Control software module Installation Refer to section for maximum cable lengths. 1 Connect a video display to the video output of he AutoDome video camera.

60 ALLEGIANT Video Systeem Power Code Out Alarm Status Battery Low DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 60 2 Connect the LTC5136 AutoDome Controller to the AutoDome video camera. 3 Set the pre-positions of the AutoDome video camera with the AutoDome controller. 4 Make sure that all pre-positions of the AutoDome video camera are correct. 5 Disconnect the LTC5136 AutoDome Controller from the AutoDome video camera. 6 Set the protocol and baudrate for serial port 1 and serial port 2 of the central control unit (refer to section and table 8.20). 9 pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU Terminal 1 SG 2 TxD 3 RxD 4 +BP 5 -BP 6 SHLD 7 +BP 8 -BP AutoDome table 8.20: DCN-CCU to PC and AutoDome Device Serial port Settings PC Port 1 Protocol: Full Baudrate: 115.2k AutoDome Port 2 Protocol: Camera control Baudrate: 9.6k 7 Connect the serial ports of the central control unit to the PC and the AutoDome video camera (refer to figure 8.24 and figure 8.25). figure 8.25: DCN-CCU to AutoDome Refer to section for maximum cable lengths. 8 Install the LBB4188 Camera Control software module in the PC (refer to the DCN Next Generation Software Installation Instructions). 9 Attach the pre-positions of the AutoDome video camera to the seat numbers with the LBB4188 Camera Control software module (refer to the User Manual of the LBB4188 Camera Control software module). 9 pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU 9 pole D-type (female) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI PC Video switcher with a PC Overview Refer to figure 8.26 for an overview of a system with a PC and camera control through a video switcher. PC Video cameras figure 8.24: DCN-CCU to PC Port 1 Port 2 DCN-CCU Allegiant Video display figure 8.26: Video switcher with a PC Requirements These are the requirements for a system with camera control through a video switcher with a PC:

61 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 61 Video cameras (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video cameras). Allegiant video switcher with keyboard (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video switchers). Video displays (refer to the DCN Next Generation Data Brochure for recommended video displays). Central control unit. PC with at least one serial port. LBB4188 Camera Control software module. 9 pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI pole D-type (male) SG RxD TxD CTS RTS n.c. SG n.c. n.c Installation 1 Set the protocol and baudrate for serial port 1 and serial port 2 (refer to section and table 8.21). 2 Connect the serial ports of the central control unit to the PC and the Allegiant video switcher (refer to figure 8.27 and figure 8.28). table 8.21: DCN-CCU to PC and AutoDome Device Serial port Settings PC Port 1 Protocol: Full Baudrate: 115.2k Allegiant video switcher 9 pole D-type (male) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI Port 2 Protocol: Camera control Baudrate: 19.2k 9 pole D-type (female) DCD RxD TxD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS RI DCN-CCU figure 8.28: DCN-CCU to Allegiant Allegiant Refer to section for maximum cable lengths. 3 Connect a video display to the video output of the Allegiant video switcher. 4 Install the licence for the LBB4188 Camera Control software module in the CCU or network controller (refer to the DCN Next Generation Software Installation Instructions). 5 Start the LBB4188 Camera Control software module (refer to the User Manual of the LBB4188 Camera Control software module). 6 Set the pre-positions of the video cameras with the keyboard of the Allegiant video switcher. 7 Make sure that all pre-positions of all video cameras are correct. 8 Attach the pre-positions of the video cameras to the seat numbers with the LBB4188 Camera Control software module. DCN-CCU PC figure 8.27: DCN-CCU to PC

62 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Configuration menu Overview Use the configuration menu of the central control unit to configure the central control unit and the system (refer to figure 8.29). Main Menu item Mic. Mode* 1 Menu item with sub-menu Bass* 2 * Menu item controlled by network controller when Multi Mode selected Treble* 3 7L Defaults Fault Status 4 6E FW Version 7J 7K De-init* Unit Name Monitoring 5 6B 6D SW Version 6C FPGA Version HW Version 7F 7H Level 7G Routing I/O2 Del. Display* 7I Multi Mode 6A Serial Number 7E Intercom* Enquiry 6 7Ea Assign Operator 7D Floor Distr.* 7Eb Assign Chairman 7C Request LED* 7B Att. tones* 7A Mic. Priority* Setup 7 Back < figure 8.29: Configuration menu

63 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Navigation and operation Menu items The configuration menu consists of menu items. Refer to figure 8.30 for the parts of a menu item To open the main menu To open the main menu, push the knob in the Main menu item. The main menu number and the menu item title flash. Main menu number Sub-menu character Menu item title Parameter To go through the main menu Turn the knob clockwise in the main menu to go to the next menu item in the main menu. Turn the knob counterclockwise in the main menu to go to the previous menu item in the main menu. Value figure 8.30: Menu item parts VU meter To open a sub-menu When the display shows a menu item that has three dots (...), the menu item gives access to a sub-menu. To open the sub-menu, push the knob in a menu item that has three dots. (The last sub-menu character and the menu item title flash.) Number and characters Identify menu items by the main menu number sub-menu character. The number identifies the main menu to which the menu item is connected. The characters identify the sub-menus to which the menu item is connected Menu title Each menu item has a title. The title gives a short description of the function of the menu item Parameters and values Most menu items have one or more parameters. To make adjustments, change the values of the parameters VU meter Some menu items have a VU meter. The VU meter shows the volume levels of signals. The VU meter has seven rows. To open the Setup sub-menu, you must push and hold the knob for more than 3 seconds To select menu items in a sub-menu 1 Turn the knob clockwise in a sub-menu to go to the next menu item in the sub-menu. 2 Turn the knob counterclockwise in a sub-menu to go to the previous menu item in the sub-menu To open a menu item 1 Turn the knob to select the applicable menu item. 2 When the display shows the correct menu item, push the knob to open the menu item. The display shows a cursor. table 8.22: VU meter VU meter One row on Seven rows on Triangle Minus Description No signal Maximum signal Clipped signal Disabled by control input

64 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en To select a parameter 1 Open the correct menu item (refer to section ). 2 Turn the knob to move the cursor to the parameter that is shown. 3 On the parameter, push the knob. The parameter flashes. 4 Turn the knob to go to the applicable parameter. 5 When the display shows the applicable parameter, push the knob to select the parameter. The display shows a cursor Example For an example, do as follows to change the level of audio input 2 of the central control unit: Make sure that when you do this example, you start from the main screen. 1 Push the knob to open the main menu To change the value of a parameter 1 Select the applicable parameter (refer to section ). 2 Turn the knob to move the cursor to the value. 3 Push the knob. The value flashes. 4 Turn the knob to go to the value. 5 When the display shows the correct value, push the knob to select the value. The display shows a cursor. 2 Turn the knob clockwise until 7 Setup... is reached To close a menu item 1 Turn the cursor to the last character that identifies the menu item. 2 Push the knob to close the menu item. The last character and the menu item title flash. 3 Push-and-hold the knob for 3 seconds to open the sub-menu To close a sub-menu 1 Turn the cursor to go to the last character but one that identifies the menu item. 2 Push the knob to close the sub-menu. The last character and the menu item title flash. 4 Turn the knob clockwise until 7H Level is reached To close the main menu 1 From the main menu, turn the primary knob clockwise to go to the < Back menu item. 2 From the < Back menu item, push the knob to go to the Main menu item. 5 Push the knob to go to the sub-menu.

65 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 65 6 Push the knob to open the sub-menu item. 12 Push the knob to go back to the main menu. 7 Turn the knob to move the cursor to the value that is shown. 13 Turn the knob clockwise to go to the < Back menu item. 8 On the value, push the knob. 14 Push the button to go to the main screen. 9 Turn the knob to change the value. In this example, the knob is turned counterclockwise to decrease the value from 0 db to -6 db. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the value Main screen When you start the central control unit, the display first shows Starting. The display then shows the main screen, either single mode or multi mode. Single mode is shown as default Single mode The following screen is displayed: 10 Push the knob to deselect the value. 11 Turn the knob to go to the main menu number. The main screen shows: The name of the central control unit. The default name is CCU. You can change the name with the 7K Unit Name menu item (refer to section ). The volume setting in db. PC - when the PC control software is connected to the central control unit. An indicator that shows the volume level of the loudspeakers of the contribution devices. You can turn the knob to change the volume level.

66 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Multi mode The following screen is displayed. When the CCU is in multi mode, the main screen shows: The name of the central control unit. The default name is CCU. You can change the name with the 7K Unit Name menu item (refer to section ). Multi CCU and the slave ID. An indicator that shows the volume level of the If you do not turn or push the knob for three minutes, the display automatically goes back to the Main menu item. The display does not automatically go back to the Main menu item from these menu items and their sub-menus: 5 Monitoring 7Ea Assign Operator 7Eb Assign Chairman loudspeakers of the contribution devices Pop-up message When the central control unit detects a fault, the display shows a pop-up message. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 8.23). table 8.23: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description Invalid software The central control unit cannot start. The central control unit does not contain the correct software. Downloading The central control unit downloads software. No NCO The central control unit is in multimode and the network controller is not available in the network. When a fault condition is resolved, the fault message will disappear. The message No NCO goes out of view when you push the knob.

67 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Microphone mode Use the 1 Microphone mode menu item to set the microphone mode (refer to table 8.24). table 8.24: Microphone mode sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 1 Mic. Mode Mode: Open* Override PTT Voice NOM: 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 2*, 3, 4 The microphone mode of the DCN and the maximum number of enabled delegate microphones (refer to section 8.8.1). When the central control unit is connected to the PC control software (refer to table 8.25): the PC controls the parameters of the microphone mode. the parameters cannot be changed at the CCU. table 8.25: Microphone mode sub-menu under PC control software Menu item Parameter Value Description 1 Mic. Mode Mode: Open Override PTT Voice Operator Response NOM: 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 1 The microphone mode of the DCN and the maximum number of enabled delegate microphones (refer to section 8.8.1) Bass Use the 2 Bass menu to set the level of the bass of the loudspeakers of the contribution devices (refer to table 8.26). table 8.26: Bass sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 2 Bass to 12 db (0 db*) The level of the bass output.

68 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Treble Use the 3 Treble menu to set the level of the treble of the loudspeakers of the contribution devices (refer to table 8.27). table 8.27: Treble sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 3 Treble to 12 db (0 db*) The level of the treble output Fault Status Use the 4 Fault Status menu item to see the condition messages of the central control unit. table 8.28: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description No Fault The central control unit operates correctly. No NCO The central control unit is in multi-mode and the network controller is not available in the network Monitoring Use the 5 Monitoring menu item to open the Monitoring sub-menu (refer to table 8.29). table 8.29: Monitoring sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 5 Monitoring Signal: Floor* Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Volume level: -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) The signal that is available on the headphones socket of the central control unit and its volume level.

69 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Enquiry Use the 6 Enquiry menu item to open the Enquiry sub-menu. The menu items in this sub-menu give general data about the central control unit (refer to table 8.30). This data must be mentioned in all service requests and failure reports. table 8.30: Enquiry sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value (read-only) Description 6A Serial Number --- e.g E The hexadecimal serial number of the central control unit. 6B HW Version --- e.g The version number of the hardware of the central control unit. 6C FPGA Version --- e.g The version number of the FPGA firmware of the central control unit. 6D SW Version --- e.g The version number of the software of the central control unit. 6E FW Version --- e.g The version number of the firmware of the central control unit Setup Use the 7 Setup menu item to open the Setup sub-menu. You can use the menu items in this sub-menu to configure the central control unit and the system (refer to table 8.31).

70 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 70 table 8.31: Setup sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7A Mic. Priority --- Temporarily off* Permanently off 7B Att. Tones Event: Priority* Voting Chime: Off, 1*, 2, 3 Off*, 1, 2, 3 The action taken by the system when the chairman releases the priority button (refer to section 8.8.4). The attention chimes of the system (refer to section 8.8.3). 7C Request LED LED setting Flashing*, Continuous Sets the behaviour of the request LED for the first delegate in the request list. 7D Floor Distr. --- On*, Off Enables or disables floor distribution (refer to section 8.8.5). 7E Intercom Gives access to the Intercom sub-menu (refer to section ). 7F Del. Display --- Language: English* German French Italian Dutch Spanish 7G Routing I/O Single mode: Recorder* Delegate loudspeaker Mix-minus Insertion Multi-mode: Recorder* Delegate loudspeaker Local floor 7H Level 7I Multi mode Signal: Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Mode: Single* Multi Level: -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) Multi CCU slave ID --*, 01 to 30 The language that is used by the displays of the contribution devices. Other languages (e.g. Chinese) can be downloaded to the CCU, but will overwrite the default languages. The English language cannot be overwritten. The audio routing mode of the central control unit (refer to section 8.8.2). The nominal levels of the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the central control unit. Sets the CCU to single or multi mode. The multi CCU slave ID can only be changed when the unit is in single mode (refer to section 10.7). 7J De-Init Gives access to the De-initialization menu item (refer to section ). 7K Unit Name --- Name: CCU* Custom name The name of the central control unit (max. 16 characters). 7L Defaults Gives access to the Reset menu item (refer to section )

71 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Intercom Use the menu items in the 7E Intercom sub-menu to identify the location of the chairman and the operator (refer to table 8.32 and section 8.8.6). table 8.32: Intercom sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7Ea Assign Operator No* Yes Does not start the assign operator procedure. Starts the assign operator procedure. 7Eb Assign Chairman No* Yes Does not start the assign chairman procedure. Starts the assign chairman procedure De-init Use the 7J De-initialize sub-menu item in the 7J De-Init menu to erase the addresses of the contribution devices and the interpretation devices (refer to table 8.33 and section 8.7). table 8.33: De-init sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7J De-initialize Are you sure? No* Yes Does not erase the addresses. Erases the addresses Defaults Use the Defaults sub-menu to set all parameters to the default values in the configuration menu (refer to table 8.34). table 8.34: Defaults sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7L Reset to defaults? No* Yes Does not put back the default values. Sets all parameters to the default values. This includes the values of the parameters of the interpreter desks. The name and the CCU ID are not changed. The CCU is also restarted.

72 Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Risk of electric shock. Do not open. DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 72 9 DCN-CCUB Basic Central Control Unit 9.1 Introduction The DCN-CCUB Basic Central Control Unit controls the system. The basic central control unit is a simplified version of the DCN-CCU Central Control Unit. The DCN-CCUB Basic Central Control Unit: has one RS232 connection, instead of two has one XLR output does not have any XLR inputs does not have a fault contact cannot be connected to the optical network 9.2 Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the basic central control unit (refer to figure 9.1) contains: 1 On/off switch - Starts and stops the basic central control unit. 2 Display - Shows the configuration menu (refer to section 9.10). 3 Knob - Operates the configuration menu (refer to section 9.10). You can also change the volume level of the system with the knob. 4 Headphones socket - Connects headphones to the basic central control unit (refer to section 9.5.3) The DCN-CCUB-UL is the CSA/UL approved version of the DCN-CCUB Caution Avis RS 232 Mains Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Trunk : V 50-60Hz T2.5A 250V 230: V 50-60Hz T2A H 250V figure 9.1: Front and rear views

73 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Rear view The rear of the basic central control unit (refer to figure 9.1) contains: 5 RS232 port - Connects a PC, remote controllers, or video cameras to the basic central control unit (refer to section 9.5.6). 6 Power inlet - Connects the basic central control unit to the mains power supply with a power cable (refer to section 9.5.1). 7 Ground screw - Connects the basic central control unit to ground. 8 DCN sockets - Connect the basic central control unit to the DCN (refer to section 9.5.2). 9 Audio inputs - Connect the central control unit to external analog audio sources (refer to section 9.5.4). The functions of the audio inputs are: Audio input 1: Floor Audio input 2: Selectable recorder/delegate loudspeaker/mix-minus/insertion (refer to section 8.8.2). 10 Audio outputs - Connect the central control unit to external analog audio devices (refer to section 9.5.5). The functions of the audio inputs are: Audio output 1: PA Audio output 2: Selectable recorder/delegate loudspeaker/mix-minus/insertion (refer to section 8.8.2). 11 Voltage selector - Selects the voltage on which the central control unit must operate (refer to section 9.5.1). 12 Fuse holder - Prevents damage to the internal power supply of the basic central control unit (refer to section 9.5.1). 9.4 Installation This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.4). 9.5 External connections This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.5) Power supply Refer to section for the instructions that tell you how to connect the basic central control unit to the mains power supply. The procedures to connect the central control unit and the basic central control unit to the mains power supply are the same DCN Refer to section for the instructions that tell you how to connect the basic central control unit to the trunk of the DCN. The procedures to connect the central control unit and the basic central control unit to the trunk of the DCN are the same Headphones Refer to section for information about the headphones socket of the basic central control unit. The headphones sockets of the central control unit and the basic central control unit are the same. 9.3 Internal settings This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.3). The procedure to configure the RS23 port of the basic central control unit is the same as the procedure to configure RS232 port 1 of the central control unit (refer to section 8.3.3).

74 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Audio inputs You can connect an external analog audio source to the audio inputs of the basic central control unit. The basic central control unit has two audio inputs. Each audio input has a double cinch socket for unbalanced signals (refer to figure 9.2). The audio inputs change stereo signals in mono signals. Audio In figure 9.2: Audio input, connection table 9.1: Audio input, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 Cinch Live Signal in 2 Return Shield/ground You can select the procedure that is used to send audio signals through the basic central control unit with the audio routing modes (refer to section ). 1 You can only connect line level sources to the audio inputs of the basic central control unit. It is not possible to connect microphone sources. 2 table 9.2: Audio input details, line level signals Number of connections: 1x double cinch socket Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level: Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: 12 kω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 85 max. level CMRR: > 40 db Crosstalk attenuation: > 85 max. level Distortion: < 1 -3 db of the max. input Audio outputs You can connect an audio recording device or a public address system to the audio output of the basic central control unit. The basic central control unit has two audio outputs. Audio output 1 has (refer to figure 9.3): 1 XLR plug for balanced signal (no transformer inside) 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. Audio output 2 only has a double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. 1 2 Audio Out figure 9.3: Audio output, connection

75 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 75 table 9.3: Audio output, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal out 5 Return Shield/Ground You can select the procedure that is used to send audio signals through the basic central control unit with the available audio routing modes (refer to section ). table 9.4: Audio output details Number of connections: 1x XLR plug (audio input 1 only) 1x double cinch socket Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level (audio output 1): Refer to appendix A Nominal level (audio output 2): Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: < 100 Ω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 89 max. level Crosstalk attenuation > 85 max. level Distortion: < db of the max. input RS232 port Refer to section for information about the RS232 port of the basic central control unit. The RS232 ports of the central control unit and the basic central control unit are the same. 9.6 Downloading This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.6). 9.7 Initialization This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.7). 9.8 Configuration This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.8). 9.9 Camera control configuration Introduction The basic central control unit can automatically point video cameras in the direction of the delegate or chairman that speaks. You can connect camera(s) as follows: Direct camera control in a system without a PC Camera control through a video switcher in a system without a PC Direct camera control without a PC This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.9.2), except that the baud rate and protocol settings apply to the RS232 port Video switcher without a PC This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.9.3), except that the baud rate and protocol settings apply to the RS232 port Configuration menu This information is the same for the basic central control unit and the CCU (refer to section 8.10), except that the options under sub-menu 7I (Multi mode) are not available.

76 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en DCN-NCO Network Controller 10.1 Introduction The DCN-NCO network controller controls a multi DCN-CCU system. The network controller can operate with or without a control PC. The network controller and all CCUs in a multi CCU system must be switched on in order to work correctly, even if the CCUs are set to single mode. Transmitters, CCUs and network controllers must be connected to an optical network in the power off state.

77 Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Risk of electric shock. Do not open. DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the network controller (see figure 10.1) contains: 1 Loudspeaker - for monitoring purposes. The loudspeaker is muted when headphones are connected to the headphones socket (4). 2 Display - Shows the configuration menu (refer to section 10.10). 3 Knob - Operates the configuration menu (refer to section 10.10). You can also change the volume level of the system with the knob. 4 Headphones socket - Connects headphones to the network controller (refer to section ) Caution Avis Audio In 3 Audio Out 3 Audio In 4 Audio Out 4 Mains 115/230~ Control In 230: V~ /50-60Hz T2A H 250V O I RS 232 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 115: V~/50-60Hz T2.5A 250V Network Ethernet Battery 48V 4 A 1 2 Control Out C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO V 48V figure 10.1: Front and rear views of the network controller

78 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Rear view The rear of the network controller (refer to figure 10.1) contains the following: 5 Ground screw - Connects the network controller to ground. 6 Audio inputs - Connect the network controller to external analog audio sources (refer to section ). The functions of the audio inputs are: Audio input 1: Not used Audio input 2: Not used Audio input 3: Floor Audio input 4: Selectable Floor/insertion/mixminus (refer to section ). 7 Audio outputs - Connect the network controller to external analog audio devices (refer to section ). The functions of the audio inputs are: Audio output 1: PA Audio output 2: Recorder Audio output 3: Delegate loudspeaker Audio output 4: Selectable Floor/insertion/mixminus (refer to section ). 8 Voltage selector - Selects the voltage on which the network controller must operate (refer to section ). 9 Mains on/off switch - Starts and stops the network controller (refer to section ). 10 Fuse holder - Prevents damage to the internal power supply of the network controller (refer to section ). 11 Optical network sockets - Connect the network controller to the optical network (refer to section ). 12 Ethernet interface - Connects the network controller to external logging and configuration devices/systems. This interface is usually used to connect a control PC (refer to section ) or an open interface client to the system. 13 Control inputs - Available for future use. 14 RS232 port - Connects a control camera to the network controller. 15 Control outputs - Control output 1 used for the fault contact (refer to section ). Other outputs available for future use. 16 Battery 48V - Connects a back-up battery supply to the network controller (refer to section ). 17 Power inlet - Connects the network controller to the mains power supply with a power cable (refer to section ) Internal settings Overview Caution Before you open the network controller, disconnect it from the mains power supply. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you. Caution Before you open the network controller, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges. The interior of the network controller (see figure 10.2) contains: 18 Ground jumper - A jumper that connects the signal ground to the safety ground. 19 Slot for compact flash card - Not used for this application.

79 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en figure 10.2: Internal view of the network controller Ground Use the ground jumper block to connect and disconnect the system ground and the ground of the network controller (refer to table 10.1). For example, you can connect the system ground and the ground of the network controller to prevent hum. When you connect the system ground to the ground of more than one device in the system, you can create ground loops. Ground loops can cause hum. table 10.1: Ground jumper block (* = default) Jumper shunt Description Connected Connects the system ground and the ground of the network controller. Disconnected * Disconnects the system ground and the ground of the network controller.

80 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Downloading To download the software do the following: 1 Install the download and license tool on a PC (the download and license tool is on the CD). 2 Connect all central equipment to the network controller, except the CCUs. 3 Connect the PC to the network controller. 4 Set the PC communication port to network connection. 5 Configure the correct IP address (refer to section ). 6 Download the network controller. 7 Download optical devices. 8 Set the PC communications port to serial connection. 9 Disconnect all CCUs. 10 Select the correct serial port and baud rate of each CCU (refer to section 8.3.3). 11 Connect the CCUs, one at a time, to the PC. 12 Download to the CCU: software for wired DCN (refer to section 8.6) Installation Refer to section 8.4 for information about the installation of the network controller. The procedures to install the central control unit and the network controller are the same External connections Power supply To connect the network controller to a mains power supply proceed as follows: 1 Set the voltage selector on the rear of the network controller to the correct position (refer to table 10.2). table 10.2: Voltage selector Power supply voltage Voltage selector 90 to 132 V(AC) to 264 V(AC) Make sure that the fuse holder in the rear of the network controller contains the correct fuse (refer to table 10.3). Do not change the language selection when downloading the CCUs. table 10.3: Fuses Voltage selector Fuse 115 T2.5A 250 V (UL 248) 230 T2AH 250 V (IEC 60127) For the system to work correctly, all software and firmware of the central equipment and PC must be of the same release. If you connect the network controller via a network, check with your IT department which IP address to use. 3 Connect a locally approved power cable to the network controller. 4 Connect the power cable to a power supply. Caution Make sure that the mains power supply is grounded. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you.

81 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Connecting back-up power Connect the back-up supply to the back-up power connector on the back of the network controller. Refer to figure Use the connector supplied with the unit. The fuse for the back-up supply is inside the unit. The back-up supply input is protected against voltage reversal. The back-up voltage range is 43 to 56 V. The system voltage from the system bus is a constant 48 V. The power supply to the units that receive power from the system bus is not affected by a changing back-up battery voltage. When the network controller has a back-up power supply connected, the network controller cannot be switched off just by the mains on/off switch (9). The battery connection must also be removed Headphones Refer to section for information about the headphones socket of the network controller. The headphones sockets of the central control unit and the network controller are the same. You can select the signal that is available on the headphones socket with the configuration menu (refer to section ) Audio inputs You can connect an external analog audio source to the audio inputs of the network controller. The network controller has four audio inputs. Each audio input has (refer to figure 10.4): 1 XLR socket for balanced signals. 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR sockets of audio input 3 and audio input 4 contain transformers. Battery 48V 4 A The audio inputs change stereo signals in mono signals. 2 1 Audio In + 0 figure 10.3: Back-up power supply Optical network Connect the trunk of the optical network to the optical network sockets of the network controller with optical network cables. table 10.4: Optical network connections Number of connections: 2x proprietary sockets Location: Rear side Nodes: 2 Power supply: max. 65 W (refer to section ) 3 4 figure 10.4: Audio input, connection table 10.5: Audio input, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal in 5 Return Shield/ground 5

82 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 82 You can select the procedure that is used to send audio signals through the network controller with the audio routing modes (refer to section ). You can only connect line level sources to the audio inputs of the network controller. It is not possible to connect microphone sources. table 10.6: Audio input details, line level signals Number of connections: 1x XLR socket for each audio input 1x double cinch socket for each audio input Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level: Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: XLR: 22 kω Cinch: 12 kω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 85 max. level CMRR: > Hz > 50 1 khz Crosstalk attenuation: > 85 max. level Distortion: < db of the max. input Audio outputs You can connect an audio recording device or a public address system to the audio outputs of the network controller. The network controller has four audio outputs. Each audio output has (refer to figure 10.5): 1 XLR plug for balanced signals. 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR plugs of audio output 3 and audio output 4 contain transformers. The two cinch sockets contain the same mono signal. 1 Audio Out figure 10.5: Audio output, connection table 10.7: Audio output, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal out 5 Return Shield/Ground 5

83 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 83 You can select the procedure that is used to send audio signals through the network controller with the available audio routing modes (refer to section ) Fault contact The network controller has 5 control outputs (see figure 10.6). Control output 1 is used for the fault contact. table 10.8: Audio output details Number of connections: 1x XLR plug for each audio output 1x double cinch socket for each audio output Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level(s) Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: < 100 Ω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 89 max. level Crosstalk attenuation: > 85 max. level Distortion: < db of the max. input Use the fault contact to send the condition of the network controller to external devices. If the network controller operates correctly, the OK pin is internally connected. The network controller internally connects the Fail pins when: The network controller is stopped. The power supply (internal or external) operates incorrectly. The network controller does a reset. Control Out C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO figure 10.6: Control outputs The common (C) pin of the control output should always be connected. Whether the other pin that is connected is the normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) depends on which action that has to take place when the control output is active (see table 10.9). table 10.9: Control outputs details Connection Abbr. Description Normally closed Normally open NC NO By default, the NC contact is connected with common contact C. When the output is activated, the NC contact is opened. By default, the NO contact is not connected with common contact C. When the output is activated, the NO contact is closed.

84 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Ethernet connection Introduction A PC can be connected to the Ethernet connection of the network controller RS232 ports The network controller has a RS232 port for connecting dome camera and video switchers (refer to section 10.9). You can use the menu to set the baudrate of the RS232 port (refer to section ) Direct connection If your PC does not support automatic crossover, a crossover cable (Cat-5 cable) must be used (see figure 10.7). 5 1 RJ 45 (male) TX+ 1 TX- 2 RX+ 3 no sig. 4 no sig. 5 RXno sig. 7 6 no sig. 8 Network Controller RJ 45 (male) 1 TX+ 2 TX- 3 RX+ 4 no sig. 5 no sig. 6 RXno sig. 7 8 no sig. figure 10.7: Direct connection to PC using crossover cable The maximum length of a crossover-cable is 100 m Via a network If the control PC must be connected to the network controller via a network, standard cables must be used to connect both the network controller and the control PC to the network. PC 9 6 figure 10.8: RS232 port, connection table 10.10: RS232 port, connection Pin Definition Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Select 2 RxD Receive Data 3 TxD Transmit Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready 5 SG Signal Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 RTS Request To Send 8 CTS Clear To Send 9 RI Ring Indicator table 10.11: RS232 ports Number of connections: 1x 9-pole SUB-D socket Location: Rear side Maximum cable length: 9600 baud: 15 m, >9600 baud: 3 m Signal levels: EIA RS232-C interface specifications Caution Do not connect the network controller and control PC to any network without consulting the network administrator.

85 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Initialization Initialize a multi CCU system as follows: 1 Initialize each CCU and all of its devices (refer to section 8.7). 2 For each CCU, select a unique multi CCU slave, and change the mode from "single" to "multi". (refer to table 8.31, menu item 7I Multi mode). C C 4< 3 4 You can only change the multi CCU slave ID when the CCU is in single mode. C I I Configuration DCN-SW Microphone modes This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.8.1) Audio routing modes Introduction You can set the audio routing of audio input 4 and audio output 4 with the 7G Routing I/O 4 menu item (see section ). The functions of audio inputs 1, 2, and 3 and audio outputs 1, 2, and 3 of the network controller cannot be changed: The signal on audio input 3 is added to the floor signal. The signal on audio output 1 is suitable to connect the system to an external public address system. The network controller does not set the volume level, bass, and treble. The signal on audio output 2 is suitable to connect the system to a recorder. The signal on audio output 3 is suitable to connect the system to an external public address system and contains the floor signal, which is sent to the delegate loudspeakers. The network controller sets the volume level, bass, and treble. C DCN-CCU figure 10.9: Floor + Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices Optical network + Chime Floor In the Floor mode, audio output 4 of the network controller transmits the same signal as output 1 (refer to figure 10.9). In the Floor mode, the signal on audio input 4 of the network controller is added to the floor signal.

86 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Insertion In the Insertion mode, audio output 4 and audio input 4 of the network controller are used to add signals from external audio devices (refer to figure 10.10). For example, you can connect an external audio mixer between audio output 4 and audio input 4 of the network controller Mix-minus Use the Mix-minus mode to: connect to a telephone coupler. connect two systems together. The Mix-minus connection does not cause acoustic feedback. C C 4< 3 When you connect to a telephone coupler: Go to menu item 7G Routing I/O 4 to set the systems to the Mix minus mode. Connect audio input 4 and audio output 4 to the telephone coupler. C I I DCN-SW When you connect two systems together (refer to figure 10.11): Go to menu item 7G Routing I/O 4 to set the systems in the Mix minus mode. Connect audio input 4 of the first system to audio output 4 of the second system. Connect audio output 4 of the first system to audio input 4 of the second system. 3 C DCN-CCU + Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices Optical network + Chime figure 10.10: Insertion In the Insertion mode, you must install a device between audio output 4 and audio input 4 of the network controller. When you do not install a device, the audio signals from contribution devices (floor) leave the system, but do not enter the system again.

87 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 87 C C 4< Attention chimes This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.8.3) Erase requests-to-speak and speakers This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.8.4). C I I DCN-SW Floor distribution This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.8.5) Intercom This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.8.6). C DCN-CCU figure 10.11: Mix-minus + Legend C Contribution devices I Interpretation devices Optical network + Chime When the distance between the two systems is great, you can use a telephone coupler to connect the two systems Camera control configuration Introduction The network controller can automatically point video cameras in the direction of the delegate or chairman that speaks. You can connect camera(s) as follows: Direct camera control in a system without a PC. Camera control through a video switcher in a system without a PC. Direct camera control in a system with a PC. Camera control through a video switcher in a system with a PC.

88 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Direct camera control without a PC This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.9.2), except that: the protocol for RS 232 on the network controller is permanently set to camera control. the baud rate has to be set with menu item 7I Camera Cntrl (refer to section ) Video switcher without a PC This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.9.3), except that: the protocol for RS 232 on the network controller is permanently set to camera control. the baud rate has to be set with menu item 7I Camera Cntrl (refer to section ) Direct control with a PC This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.9.4), except that: the protocol for RS 232 on the network controller is permanently set to camera control. the baud rate has to be set with menu item 7I Camera Cntrl (refer to section ). the PC is connected to the Ethernet connector, and the correct IP address has to be set (refer to section ) Video switcher with a PC This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section 8.9.5), except that: the protocol for RS 232 on the network controller is permanently set to camera control. the baud rate has to be set with menu item 7I Camera Cntrl (refer to section ). the PC is connected to the Ethernet connector, and the correct IP address has to be set (refer to section )

89 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Configuration menu Overview Use the configuration menu of the network controller to configure the network controller and the system (refer to figure 10.12). Main Menu item Mic.Mode 1 Menu item with sub-menu Bass 2 Treble 3 6G MAC Address 7L Defaults 6F FW Version 7K Unit Name Fault Status 4 6E SW Version 7J TCP/IP Monitoring 5 6D FPGA2 Version 7I 7Ja Cam. Control Address 7Jb Subnet Mask 6C FPGA1 Version 7H Level 7Jc Def. Gateway 6B HW Version 7G Routing I/O4 Enquiry 6 6A Serial Number 7E 7F Del. Display Intercom 7Ea Assign Operator 7D Floor Distr. 7Eb Assign Chairman 7C Request LED 7B Att. tones 7A Mic. Priority Setup 7 Back < figure 10.12: Configuration menu

90 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Navigation and operation This information is the same for the network controller and the CCU (refer to section ) Main screen When you start the network controller, the display first shows Starting. The display then shows the main screen: The main screen shows: The name of the network controller. The default name is NCO. You can change the name with the 7K Unit Name menu item (refer to section ). The volume setting in db. PC - when the PC control software is connected to the central control unit. An indicator that shows the volume level of the loudspeakers of the contribution devices Pop-up message When the network controller detects a fault, the display shows a pop-up message. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 10.12). table 10.12: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description Downloading The network controller downloads software. CCU Missing This message is shown if the network controller detects that a CCU is lost. Incompatible SW This message is shown if the network controller detects incompatible software versions between master and one or more slave CCUs. When a fault condition is resolved, the fault message will disappear. The message CCU Missing, and Incompatible SW go out of view when you push the knob. You can turn the knob to change the volume level. If you do not turn or push the knob for three minutes, the display automatically goes back to the Main menu item. The display does not automatically go back to the Main menu item from these menu items: 5 Monitoring 7Ea Assign Operator 7Eb Assign Chairman To remove a CCU from the network configuration, switch off the NCO, and then switch it back on again.

91 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Microphone mode Use the 1 Microphone mode menu item to set the microphone mode (refer to table 10.13). table 10.13: Microphone mode sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 1 Mic. Mode Mode: Open* Override PTT Voice NOM: 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 2*, 3, 4 The microphone mode of the DCN and the maximum number of enabled delegate microphones (refer to section 8.8.1). When the central control unit is connected to the PC control software (refer to table 10.14): the PC controls the parameters of the microphone mode. the parameters cannot be changed at the CCU. table 10.14: Microphone mode sub-menu under PC control software Menu item Parameter Value Description 1 Mic. Mode Mode: Open Override PTT Voice Operator Response NOM: 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 2*, 3, 4 1, 2*, 3, 4 1 The microphone mode of the DCN and the maximum number of enabled delegate microphones (refer to section 8.8.1) Bass Use the 2 Bass menu to set the level of the bass of the loudspeakers of the contribution devices (refer to table 10.15). table 10.15: Bass sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 2 Bass to 12 db (0 db*) The level of the bass output.

92 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Treble Use the 3 Treble menu to set the level of the treble of the loudspeakers of the contribution devices (refer to table 10.16). table 10.16: Treble sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 3 Treble to 12 db (0 db*) The level of the treble output Fault Status Use the 4 Fault Status menu item to see the condition of the network controller. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 10.17). table 10.17: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description No Fault The network controller operates correctly. CCU Missing This message is shown if the NCO detects that a CCU is lost. Incompatible SW This message is shown if the NCO detects incompatible software versions between master and one or more slave CCUs Monitoring Use the 5 Monitoring menu item to open the Monitoring sub-menu (refer to table 10.18). table 10.18: Monitoring sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 5 Monitoring Signal: None* Floor Input 3 Input 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Volume level: Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) Mute, -31 to 0 db (-16 db*) The signal that is available on the headphones socket of the network controller and its volume level. If headphones are not connected, the signal is available on the loudspeaker.

93 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Enquiry Use the 6 Enquiry menu item to open the Enquiry sub-menu. The menu items in this sub-menu give general data about the network controller (refer to table 10.19). This data must be mentioned in all service requests and failure reports. table 10.19: Enquiry sub-menu Menu item Parameter Value (read-only) Description 6A Serial Number --- e.g E The hexadecimal serial number of the network controller. 6B HW Version --- e.g The version number of the hardware of the network controller. 6C FPGA1 Version --- e.g The version number of the MIF FPGA firmware of the network controller. 6D FPGA2 Version --- e.g The version number of the MMU FPGA firmware of the network controller. 6E SW Version --- e.g The version number of the software of the network controller. 6F FW Version --- e.g The version number of the firmware of the network controller. 6G MAC address --- e.g AB The MAC address of the network adaptor Setup Use the 7 Setup menu item to open the Setup sub-menu. You can use the menu items in this sub-menu to configure the network controller and the system (refer to table 10.20).

94 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 94 table 10.20: Setup sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7A Mic. Priority --- Temporarily off* Permanently off 7B Att. Tones Event: Priority* Voting Chime: Off, 1*, 2, 3 Off*, 1, 2, 3 7C Request LED Led setting Flashing*, Continuously lit The action taken by the system when the chairman releases the priority button (refer to section 8.8.4). The attention chimes of the system (refer to section 8.8.3). Sets the behaviour of the request LED for the first delegate in the request list. 7D Floor Distr. --- On*, Off Enables or disables floor distribution (refer to section 8.8.5). 7E Intercom Gives access to the Intercom sub-menu (refer to section ). 7F Del. Display --- Language: English* German French Italian Dutch Spanish 7G Routing I/O Mode: Floor* Mix-minus Insertion 7H Level Signal: Input 3* Input 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 7I Camera Cntrl Baudrate Baudrate: 9.6k 19.2k* 57.6k 115.2k Level: -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) The language that is used by the displays of the contribution devices. Other languages (e.g. Chinese) can be downloaded to the network controller, but will overwrite the default languages. The English language cannot be overwritten. Changes the audio routing of output 4 The nominal levels of the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the network controller. Sets the baudrate for the camera control (refer to section 10.9). 7J TCP/IP Gives access to the TCP/IP submenus (refer to section ). 7K Unit Name --- Name: CCU* Custom name The name of the network controller (max. 16 characters). 7L Defaults Gives access to the Reset menu item (refer to section )

95 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Intercom Use the menu items in the 7E Intercom sub-menu to identify the location of the chairman and the operator (refer to table and section 8.8.6). table 10.21: Intercom sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7Ea Assign Operator No* Yes Does not start the assign operator procedure. Starts the assign operator procedure. 7Eb Assign Chairman No* Yes Does not start the assign chairman procedure. Starts the assign chairman procedure TCP/IP Use the sub-menus TCP/IP Address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway in the 7J TCP/IP menu to set their respective values (refer to table 10.22). table 10.22: TCP/IP sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7Ja Address --- e.g Sets the TCP/IP address. 7Jb Subnet Mask --- e.g Sets the TCP/IP subnet mask 7Jc Def. Gateway --- e.g Sets the TCP/IP default gateway Defaults Use the Defaults sub-menu to set all parameters to the default values in the configuration menu (refer to table 10.23). table 10.23: Defaults sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 7L Reset to defaults? No* Yes Does not put back the default values. Sets all parameters to the default values. This includes the values of the parameters of the interpreter desks. The name is not changed.

96 Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Risk of electric shock. Do not open. DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en LBB4402/00 Audio Expander The firmware version of the audio expander must be the same as the firmware version of the central control unit. You can send firmware to the audio expander and to the central control unit with the: Download and License Tool PC Control Software 11.1 Introduction Use the LBB4402/00 Audio Expander if the system needs more than two analog audio inputs or audio outputs. Typically, the audio expander is used to: Connect external recording devices to the system Send audio signals to external devices Connect systems 11.2 Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the audio expander (refer to figure 11.1) contains: 1 Display - Shows the configuration menu (refer to section 11.5). 2 Knob - Operates the configuration menu (refer to section 11.5). 3 Headphones socket - Connects headphones to the audio expander (refer to section ) Caution Avis ControlIn Audio In 3 Audio Out 3 Audio In 4 Audio Out 4 Audio In 1 Audio Out 1 Audio In 2 Audio Out 2 Network 1 2 ControlOut C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO 48V 48V figure 11.1: Front and rear views

97 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Rear view The rear of the audio expander (refer to figure 11.1) contains: 4 Control inputs - Connect the audio expander to external devices. Through the control inputs, external devices can control the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the audio expander (refer to section ). 5 Audio inputs - Connect the audio expander to external analog audio sources (refer to section ). 6 Audio outputs - Connect the audio expander to external analog audio devices (refer to section ). 7 Ground screw - Connects the audio expander to ground. 8 Optical network sockets - Connect the audio expander to the optical network (refer to section ). 9 Control outputs - Send the condition of the audio expander to external devices (refer to section ) Installation You can install the audio expander in a 19-inch rack system or on a flat surface. Four feet and two brackets are supplied with the audio expander (refer to figure 11.2). figure 11.2: Installation table 11.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d), flat surface: 92 x 440 x 400 mm (without brackets, with feet) Dimensions (h x w x d), 19-inch rack system: 88 x 483 x 400 mm (with brackets, without feet) Weight: 7.0 kg (without brackets, without feet). If you install the audio expander in a 19-inch rack system, the audio expander extends 36 mm in front of the brackets.

98 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en External connections Optical network Connect the optical network sockets of the audio expander to the optical network with optical network cables (refer to figure 11.3) Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones socket of the audio expander. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 11.4) figure 11.4: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 11.3: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right figure 11.3: Optical network table 11.2: Optical network connections Number of connections: 2x proprietary sockets Location: Rear side Nodes: 1 Power consumption: 7.6 W You can also connect mono headphones to the headphones socket. You can select the signal that is available on the headphones socket with the configuration menu (refer to section ).

99 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Audio inputs You can connect external analog audio sources to the audio inputs of the audio expander. The audio expander has four audio inputs. Each audio input has (refer to figure 11.5): 1 XLR socket for balanced signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR sockets contain transformers. 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals. The audio inputs change stereo signals in mono signals. 2 Audio In figure 11.5: Audio input, connection table 11.4: Audio input, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal in 5 Return Shield/ground 5 You can connect line level sources to all audio inputs of the audio expander. table 11.5: Audio inputs, line level signals Number of connections: 1x XLR socket for each audio input 1x double cinch socket for each audio input Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level: Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Impedance: XLR: 22 kω Cinch: 12 kω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 87 max. output level CMRR: > Hz Crosstalk attenuation: > -85 max. level Distortion: < db of the max. level When the interlock is None (refer to section ), the audio inputs of the audio expander are disabled for translation channels only. Audio input channels can route to floor channels.

100 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 100 You can connect microphone sources (refer to table 11.6) only to the XLR plugs of audio input 1 and audio input 2 of the audio expander. table 11.6: Audio inputs, microphone signal Number of connections: 1x XLR socket for each audio input Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Nominal level: Refer to appendix A Range: Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Hz, 1 khz and 10 khz Impedance: 1360 Ω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 62 dba CMMR: > Hz > 65 1 khz and 10 khz Phantom power supply: V (max. 15 ma) Use the configuration menu to configure the audio inputs of he audio expander (refer to section ) Audio outputs You can connect audio recording devices or public address systems to the audio outputs of the audio expander. The audio expander has four audio outputs. Each audio output has (refer to figure 11.6): 1 XLR plug for balanced signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR plugs contain transformers. 1 double cinch socket for unbalanced signals The two cinch sockets contain the same mono signal. 1 Audio Out figure 11.6: Audio output, connection table 11.7: Audio output, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal out 5 Return Shield/Ground 5

101 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 101 Use the configuration menu to configure the audio outputs of the audio expander (refer to section ). table 11.8: Audio outputs Number of connections: 1x XLR socket for each audio output 1x double cinch socket for each audio output Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum output level: Refer to appendix A Nominal output level (floor): Refer to appendix A Nominal output level (interpreter channels): Refer to appendix A Frequency response: Hz and 20 khz Output impedance: < 100 Ω Signal-to-noise ratio: > 89 max. output level Crosstalk attenuation: > 85 db Distortion: < 1 -3 db of max. input level Control inputs The audio expander has eight control inputs. With the control inputs, remote interpretation systems can control the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the audio expander. Each audio input and audio output has a control input (refer to figure 11.7 and table 11.9). table 11.9: Control inputs, connection Control input Connection 1 Audio input 1 2 Audio input 2 3 Audio input 3 4 Audio input 4 5 Audio output 1 6 Audio output 2 7 Audio output 3 8 Audio output 4 When the circuit that is connected to a control input of an audio input or audio output is open, the audio input or audio output is enabled. Close the control input to disable the audio input or audio output. When an control input is disabled, an X character replaces the VU meter of the corresponding audio input or audio output on the display. table 11.10: Control inputs Number of connections: 8x control inputs on 16-pole plug Location: Rear side Signaling: Potential-free change-over relay Signal voltage: Max. 24 V(DC), 15 V(AC) Control In figure 11.7: Control inputs, connection

102 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Control outputs The audio expander has five control outputs (refer to figure 11.8). Control Out C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO figure 11.8: Control outputs, connection With the control outputs, you can: Send the condition of the audio inputs to external devices (control output 1, 2, 3 and 4). Send the condition of the connection of the optical network to external devices (control output 5). table 11.11: Control output conditions Control output Condition of C-NO connected C-NC connected 1 Channel attached to audio input 1 Engaged Not engaged 2 Channel attached to audio input 2 Engaged Not engaged 3 Channel attached to audio input 3 Engaged Not engaged 4 Channel attached to audio input 4 Engaged Not engaged 5 Optical network Not available Available table 11.12: Control output, connection Number of connections: 5x control outputs on 16-pole plug Location: Rear side Maximum cable length: 1,000 m Contact type: SPDT (Relay contact, single pole, change-over contact Contact voltage: 24 V(DC) Contact current: 1 A Off state (de-energized): C-NC is closed, C-NO is open

103 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Configuration menu Overview Use the configuration menu of the audio expander to configure the audio expander (refer to figure 11.9). Main Menu item Menu item with sub-menu Fault Status 1 2B Input Engaged 2A Source/Volume Monitoring 2 3C FW Version 4F Defaults 3B HW Version 4E Unit Name 3A Serial Number 4D Routing Enquiry 3 4C Level 4B AGC 4A Input Mode Setup 4 Back < figure 11.9: Configuration menu

104 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Navigation and operation Refer to section for information about the navigation and operation of the configuration menu of the audio expander. The navigation and operation of the configuration menu of the audio expander is the same as for the central control unit Main When you start the audio expander, the display first shows Starting. The display then shows the Main menu item. If you do not turn or push the knob for three minutes, the display automatically goes back to the Main menu item. The display does not automatically go back to the Main menu item from the 2 Monitoring menu item and its sub-menus. The Main menu item contains: The name of the audio expander. The default name is Analog Expander. You can change the name with the 4E Unit Name menu item (refer to section ). Eight VU meters that show the volume levels of the audio inputs and audio outputs of the audio expander (refer to section ). When an control input is disabled, an X character replaces the VU meter of the corresponding audio input or audio output on the display Fault pop-up When the audio expander detects a fault, the display shows a message. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 11.13). table 11.13: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description Upgrade unit sw The audio expander does contain the correct firmware. You can send firmware to the audio expander with the: Download and License Tool PC Control Software Downloading The audio expander downloads software. Max. CH mismatch No network You have attached an audio input or audio output to a channel that does not exist. The audio expander cannot find the optical network. When a fault condition is resolved, the fault message will disappear. The messages Max. CH mismatch, and No network go out of view when you push the knob Fault status Use the 1 Fault Status menu item to see condition messages of the audio expander. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 11.14). table 11.14: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description No Fault The audio expander operates correctly. Max. CH mismatch No network You have attached an audio input or audio output to a channel that does not exist. The audio expander cannot find the optical network.

105 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Monitoring Use the 2 Monitoring menu item to open the Monitoring sub-menu (refer to table 11.15). table 11.15: Monitoring sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 2A Source/Volume 2B Input Engaged Signal: In 1* In 2 In 3 In 4 Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 Audio input: 1, 2, 3, 4 Volume level: -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) The signal that is available on the headphones socket of the audio expander and its volume level. The menu item also shows the attached channel (read-only). If the menu item shows the number of the audio input, the channel on the audio input is already added to the system by another (digital) audio expander, a cobranet interface or an interpreter desk Enquiry Use the 3 Enquiry menu item to open the Enquiry sub-menu. The menu items in this sub-menu give general data about the audio expander (refer to table 11.7). This data must be mentioned in all service requests and failure reports. table 11.16: Enquiry sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value (read-only) Description 3A Serial Number --- e.g The hexadecimal serial number of the audio expander. 3B HW Version --- e.g The version number of the hardware of the audio expander. 3C FW Version --- e.g The version number of the firmware of the audio expander.

106 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Setup Use the 4 Setup menu item to open the Setup sub-menu. Use the menu items in this sub-menu to configure the audio expander (refer to table 11.17). To open the Setup sub-menu, you must push and hold the knob for more than 3 seconds. table 11.17: Setup sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4A Input Mode Gives access to the Input Mode sub-menu (refer to section ). 4B AGC 4C Level 4D Routing Input: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Signal: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Signal: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 AGC: On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Level: -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -6 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) -24 to 6 db (0 db*) Channel: --, 00 to 31 --, 00 to 31 --, 00 to 31 --, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 4E Unit Name --- Name: Analog Expander* Custom name Sets the automatic gain control (AGC) of the audio inputs on and off (refer to section ). The levels of the audio inputs and the audio outputs of audio expander. The channel that is attached to the audio input or audio output of the audio expander. (PA = public address system.) The name of the audio expander (max. 16 characters). 4F Defaults Opens the Reset menu item (refer to section ).

107 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Input mode Use the Input mode sub-menu to set the input mode of audio input 1 and audio input 2 of the audio expander. Both inputs accept line level signals and microphone signals. When you connect a microphone signal to an audio input, you can also enable or disable the phantom power supply of the audio input (refer to table 11.17). table 11.18: Input mode sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4A Input 1 4A Input 2 Input mode Phantom Input mode Phantom Line*, Mic On, Off* Line*, Mic On, Off* The input mode of audio input 1. The input mode of audio input Automatic gain control (AGC) Use the AGC menu item to enable or disable the AGC of the audio inputs. If necessary, enable the AGC for the audio inputs that inject external interpretations in the system. The AGC makes sure that the nominal level of the received interpretations is 9 dbv (XLR), -6 dbv (cinch). When the nominal input of an external interpretation is high, the audio of the external interpretations will be too loud compared to the audio of the internal interpretations from the interpreter desks. When channel 00 is attached to an audio input, the system automatically disables AGC for the audio input. You cannot manually enable AGC for an audio input to which channel 00 is attached. If two systems are connected by audio connections (Cobranet, AEX, or DEX), set the AGC to off.

108 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Defaults Use the Defaults sub-menu to put back the default values for all parameters in the configuration menu (refer to table 11.19). table 11.19: Defaults sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4F Reset to defaults No* Yes Does not put back the default values. Sets all parameters to the default values. The name is not changed.

109 Risk of electric shock. Do not open. Risk of electric shock. Do not open. DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en PRS-4DEX4 Digital Audio Expander The firmware version of the digital audio expander must be the same as the firmware version of the central control unit. You can send firmware to the digital audio expander and to the central control unit with the: Download and License Tool PC Control Software 12.1 Introduction Use the PRS-4DEX4 Digital Audio Expander if the system needs digital audio inputs or outputs. Typically, the digital audio expander is used to: Connect external recording devices to the system Send audio signals to external devices Connect systems 12.2 Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the digital audio expander (refer to figure 12.1) contains: 1 Display - Shows the configuration menu (refer to section 12.5). 2 Knob - Operates the configuration menu (refer to section 12.5). 3 Headphones socket - Connects headphones to the digital audio expander (refer to section ) Caution Avis Control In AES/EBU-SPDIF In 1 Out 1 AES/EBU-SPDIF In 2 Out 2 Network 1 2 Control Out C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO 48V 48V figure 12.1: Front and rear views

110 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Rear view The rear of the digital audio expander (refer to figure 12.1) contains: 4 Control inputs - Connect the audio expander to external devices. Through the control inputs, external devices can control the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the audio expander (refer to section ). 5 Ground screw - Connects the digital audio expander to ground. 6 Optical network sockets - Connect the audio expander to the optical network (refer to section ). 7 Control outputs - Send the condition of the audio expander to external devices (refer to section ). 8 Audio inputs - Connect the audio expander to external digital audio sources (refer to section ). 9 Audio outputs - Connect the audio expander to external digital audio devices (refer to section ) Installation You can install the digital audio expander in a 19-inch rack system or on a flat surface. Four feet and two brackets are supplied along with the digital audio expander (refer to figure 12.2). figure 12.2: Installation table 12.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d), flat surface: 92 x 440 x 400 mm (without brackets, with feet) Dimensions (h x w x d), 19-inch rack system: 88 x 483 x 400 mm (with brackets, without feet) Weight: 7.0 kg (without brackets, without feet). If you install the digital audio expander in a 19-inch rack system, the digital audio expander extends 36 mm in front of the brackets.

111 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en External connections Optical network Connect the optical network sockets of the digital audio expander to the optical network with optical network cables (refer to figure 12.3) Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones socket of the digital audio expander. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 12.4) figure 12.4: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 12.3: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right figure 12.3: Optical network table 12.2: Optical network connections Number of connections: 2x proprietary sockets Location: Rear side Nodes: 1 Power consumption: 6.0 W You can also connect mono headphones to the headphones socket. You can select the signal that is available on the headphones socket with the configuration menu (refer to section ).

112 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Audio inputs You can connect external digital audio sources to the audio inputs of the digital audio expander. The digital audio expander has two audio inputs (refer to figure 12.5). Each audio input has: 1 XLR socket for AES/EBU signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR sockets contain transformers. 1 cinch socket for SPDIF signals. You cannot use the AES/EBU and SPDIF connections of the same audio input at the same time. 2 1 AES/EBU-SPDIF In 1 Out 1 5 Each audio input can contain a maximum of 2 channels (L and R). The digital audio expander does not change stereo signals in mono signals. table 12.5: Audio inputs, digital signals Number of connections: 1x XLR socket for each audio input 1x cinch socket for each audio input Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum level: Refer to appendix A Nominal level: Refer to appendix A Impedance: XLR: 110 Ω Cinch: 75 kω Use the configuration menu to configure the audio inputs of the digital audio expander (refer to section ). 3 4 figure 12.5: Audio input, connection table 12.4: Audio input, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal in 5 Return Shield/ground When the interlock is None (refer to section ), the audio inputs of the digital audio expander are disabled for translation channels only. Audio input channels can route to floor channels.

113 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Audio outputs You can connect external digital audio devices to the audio outputs of the digital audio expander. The digital audio expander has two audio outputs (refer to figure 12.6). Each audio output has: 1 XLR plug for AES/EBU signals. The electric circuits behind the XLR plugs contain transformers. 1 cinch socket for SPDIF signals. You cannot use the AES/EBU and SPDIF connections of the same audio output at the same time. 5 Out 1 figure 12.6: Audio output, connection table 12.6: Audio input, connection Pin Type Signal Description 1 XLR Xternal Shield/ground 2 Live Positive 3 Return Negative 4 Cinch Live Signal in 5 Return Shield/ground Each audio output can contain a maximum of 2 channels (L and R). The digital audio expander does not change stereo signals in mono signals. table 12.7: Audio outputs, digital signals Number of connections: 1x XLR plug for each audio output 1x cinch socket for each audio output Location: Rear side Cable: Shielded cable Maximum output level: Refer to appendix A Nominal output level (floor): Refer to appendix A Nominal output level (interpreter channels): Refer to appendix A Output impedance: XLR: 110 Ω Cinch: 75 kω Use the configuration menu to configure the audio outputs of the digital audio expander (refer to section ) Control inputs The digital audio expander has eight control inputs. With the control inputs, remote systems can control the digital audio expander. Refer to section for information about the control inputs of the digital audio expander. The control inputs of the audio expander and the digital audio expander do the same Control outputs The digital audio expander has five control outputs. With the control outputs, you can send the condition of the digital audio expander to external devices. Refer to section for information about the control outputs of the digital audio expander. The control outputs of the audio expander and the digital audio expander do the same.

114 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Configuration menu Overview Use the configuration menu of the digital audio expander to configure the digital audio expander (refer to figure 12.7). Main Menu item Menu item with sub-menu Fault Status 1 2C Source Mode 2B Input Engaged 2A Source/Volume Monitoring 2 3C FW Version 3B HW Version 4E Defaults 3A Serial Number 4D Unit Name Enquiry 3 4C Routing 4B Output Mode 4A AGC Setup 4 Back < figure 12.7: Configuration menu

115 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Navigation and operation Refer to section for information about the navigation and operation of the menu of the digital audio expander. The navigation and operation of the menu of the digital audio expander is the same as for the central control unit Main When you start the digital audio expander, the display first shows Starting. The display then shows the Main menu item. If you do not turn or push the knob for three minutes, the display automatically goes back to the Main menu item. The display does not automatically go back to the Main menu item from the 2 Monitoring menu item and its sub-menus. The Main menu item contains: The name of the digital audio expander. The default name is Digital Expander. You can change the name with the 4C Unit Name menu item (refer to section ). Eight VU meters that show the volume levels of the audio inputs and audio outputs of the digital audio expander (refer to section ). When an control input is disabled, an X character replaces the VU meter of the corresponding audio input or audio output on the display Fault pop-up When the digital audio expander detects a fault, the display shows a message. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 12.8). table 12.8: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description Upgrade unit sw The digital audio expander does contain the correct firmware. You can send firmware to the digital audio expander with the: Download and License Tool PC Control Software Downloading The digital audio expander downloads software. Max. CH mismatch No network You have attached an audio input or audio output to a channel that does not exist. The digital audio expander cannot find the optical network. When a fault condition is resolved, the fault message will disappear. The messages Max. CH mismatch, and No network go out of view when you push the knob Fault status Use the 1 Fault Status menu item to see condition messages of the digital audio expander. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 12.9). table 12.9: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description No Fault The digital audio expander operates correctly. Max. CH mismatch No network You have attached an audio input or audio output to a channel that does not exist. The digital audio expander cannot find the optical network.

116 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Monitoring Use the 2 Monitoring menu item to open the Monitoring sub-menu (refer to table 12.10). table 12.10: Monitoring sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 2A Source/Volume 2B Input Engaged Audio input or output: In 1L* In 1R In 2L In 2R Out 1L Out 1R Out 2L Out 2R Audio input: 1L, 1R, 2L, 2R Volume level: -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) The signal that is available on the headphones socket of the digital audio expander and its volume level. The menu item also shows the attached channel (read-only). If the menu item shows the number of the audio input, the channel on the audio input is already added to the system by another (digital) audio expander, a cobranet interface or an interpreter desk. 2C Source Mode Gives access to the format digital audio (refer to section ) Source modes Use the menu items in the 2C Source Mode sub-menu to view the formats of the digital audio on the audio inputs of the digital audio expander (refer to table 12.11). table 12.11: Monitoring sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 2C Audio input or output: Input 1* Input 2 Format: AES/EBU, SPDIF AES/EBU, SPDIF Shows the format of the digital audio (read-only). When No valid signal is shown, the audio input does not contain a valid signal.

117 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Enquiry Use the 3 Enquiry menu item to open the Enquiry sub-menu. The menu items in this sub-menu give general data about the digital audio expander (refer to table 12.12). This data must be mentioned in all service requests and failure reports. table 12.12: Enquiry sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value (read-only) Description 3A Serial Number --- e.g. 1.A The hexadecimal serial number of the digital audio expander. 3B HW Version --- e.g The version number of the hardware of the digital audio expander. 3C FW Version --- e.g The version number of the firmware of the digital audio expander.

118 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Setup Use the 4 Setup menu item to open the Setup sub-menu. Use the menu items in this sub-menu to configure the digital audio expander (refer to table 12.13). To open the Setup sub-menu, you must push and hold the knob for more than 3 seconds. table 12.13: Setup sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4A AGC 4B Output Mode 4C Routing Input: Input 1L Input 1R Input 2L Input 2R Output: Output 1 Output 2 Input/output: Input 1L Input 1R Input 2L Input 2R Output 1L Output 1R Output 2L Output 2R AGC: On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Format: AES/EBU*, SPDIF AES/EBU*, SPDIF Channel: --*, 00 to 31 --*, 00 to 31 --*, 00 to 31 --*, 00 to 31 --*, PA, 00 to 31 --*, PA, 00 to 31 --*, PA, 00 to 31 --*, PA, 00 to 31 4D Unit Name --- Name: Digital Expander* Custom name Sets the automatic gain control (AGC) of the audio inputs on and off (refer to section ). The format of the digital audio for audio output 1 and audio output 2. The channel that is attached to the audio input or audio output of the digital audio expander. (PA = public address system.) The name of the audio expander (max. 16 characters). 4E Defaults Opens the Reset menu item (refer to section ).

119 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Defaults Use the Defaults sub-menu to put back the default values for all parameters in the configuration menu (refer to table 11.19). table 12.14: Defaults sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4E Reset to defaults No* Yes Does not put back the default values. Sets all parameters to the default values. The name is not changed Automatic gain control (AGC) Use the AGC menu item to enable or disable the AGC of the audio inputs. If necessary, enable the AGC for the audio inputs that inject external interpretations in the system. The AGC makes sure that the nominal level of the received interpretations is 9 dbv (XLR), -6 dbv (cinch). When the nominal input of an external interpretation is high, the audio of the external interpretations will be too loud compared to the audio of the internal interpretations from the interpreter desks. When channel 00 is attached to an audio input, the system automatically disables AGC for the audio input. You cannot manually enable AGC for an audio input to which channel 00 is attached. If two systems are connected by audio connections (Cobranet, AEX, or DEX), set the AGC to off.

120 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en LBB4404/00 Cobranet Interface The firmware version of the cobranet interface must be the same as the firmware version of the central control unit. You can send firmware to the cobranet interface and to the central control unit with the: Download and License Tool PC Control Software 13.1 Introduction Use the LBB4404/00 Cobranet Interface to connect the system to a CobraNet network Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the cobranet interface (refer to figure 13.1) contains: 1 Display - Shows the configuration menu (refer to section 13.5). 2 Knob - Operates the configuration menu (refer to section 13.5). 3 Headphones socket - Connect the headphones to the cobranet interface (refer to section ) Network 1 2 ControlIn ControlOut C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO 48V 48V figure 13.1: Front and rear views

121 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Rear view The rear of the cobranet interface (refer to figure 13.1) contains: 4 Optical network sockets - Connect the cobranet interface to the optical network (refer to section ). 5 CobraNet sockets - Connect the cobranet interface to the CobraNet network (refer to section ). The CobraNet network contains the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the cobranet interface. 6 Control inputs - Connect the cobranet interface to external devices. Through the control inputs, external devices can control the audio inputs and the audio outputs of the cobranet interface (refer to section ). 7 Control outputs - Send the condition of the cobranet interface to external devices (refer to section ) Installation You can install the cobranet interface in a 19-inch rack system or on a flat surface. Four feet and two brackets are supplied along with the cobranet interface (refer to figure 13.2). figure 13.2: Installation table 13.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d), flat surface 92 x 440 x 400 mm (without brackets, with feet) Dimensions (h x w x d), 19-inch rack system 88 x 483 x 400 mm (with brackets, without feet) Weight: 7.0 kg (without brackets, without feet). If you install the cobranet interface in a 19-inch rack system, the cobranet interface extends 36 mm in front of the brackets.

122 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en External connections Optical network Connect the optical network sockets of the cobranet interface to the optical network with optical network cables (refer to figure 13.3) Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones socket of the cobranet interface. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 13.4) figure 13.4: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 13.3: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right figure 13.3: Optical network table 13.2: Optical network connections Number of connections: 2x proprietary sockets Location: Rear side Nodes: 1 Power consumption: 10.5 W You can also connect mono headphones to the headphones socket. You can select the signal that is available on the headphones socket with the configuration menu (refer to section ).

123 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en CobraNet Connect the cobranet interface to the CobraNet network with UTP cables (refer to figure 13.5). Each CobraNet socket has two LEDs that indicate the condition of the connection of the cobranet interface to the CobraNet (refer to table 13.5 and table 13.6) table 13.5: Left LED Color Condition Green (on) CobraNet connection Red (flash) Unrecoverable error Red (on) Recoverable error table 13.6: Right LED Color Condition Green (on) Socket is use Yellow (on) Cobranet interface is conductor figure 13.5: CobraNet network table 13.4: CobraNet network connections Number of connections: 2x RJ45 sockets Location: Rear side Audio input: 4x Ethernet (16, 20 and 24 bit) Audio outputs: 4x Ethernet (16, 20 and 24 bit) Latency: 5.33 ms Integrity assurance: Watchdog When you connect the cobranet interface to a CobraNet network, you must: Give an IP address to the cobranet interface with CobraNet Discovery (refer to chapter 13.6). Configure the CobraNet network with CNConfig (refer to chapter 13.7) Audio inputs When the interlock is None (refer to section ), the audio inputs of the cobranet interface are disabled Control inputs The cobranet interface has eight control inputs. With the control inputs, remote systems can control the cobranet interface. Refer to section for information about the control inputs of the cobranet interface. The control inputs of the audio expander and the cobranet interface do the same Control outputs The cobranet interface has five control outputs. With the control outputs, you can send the condition of the cobranet interface to external devices. Refer to section for information about the control outputs of the cobranet interface. The control outputs of the audio expander and the cobranet interface do the same.

124 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Configuration menu Overview Use the configuration menu of the cobranet interface to configure the cobranet interface (refer to figure 13.6). Main Menu item Menu item with sub-menu Fault Status 1 2B Input Engaged 2A Source/Volume Monitoring 2 3C FW Version 3B HW Version 3A Serial Number 4D Defaults Enquiry 3 4C Unit Name 4B Routing 4A AGC Setup 4 Back < figure 13.6: Configuration menu

125 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Navigation and operation Refer to section for information about the navigation and operation of the configuration menu of the cobranet interface. The navigation and operation of the configuration menu of the cobranet interface is the same as for the central control unit Main When you start the cobranet interface, the display first shows Starting. The display then shows the Main menu item. If you do not turn or push the knob for three minutes, the display automatically goes back to the Main menu item. The display does not automatically go back to the Main menu item from the 2 Monitoring menu item and its sub-menus. The Main menu item contains: The name of the cobranet interface. The default name is CobraNet. You can change the name with the 4B Unit Name menu item (refer to section ). Eight VU meters that show the volume levels of the audio inputs and audio outputs of the cobranet interface (refer to section ). When an control input is disabled, an X character replaces the VU meter of the corresponding audio input or audio output on the display.

126 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Fault pop-up When the cobranet interface detects a fault, the display shows a message. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 13.7). table 13.7: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description Upgrade unit sw The cobranet interface does contain the correct firmware. You can send firmware to the cobranet interface with the: Download and License Tool PC Control Software Downloading The cobranet interface downloads software. Max. CH mismatch You have attached an audio input or audio output to a channel that does not exist. CobraNet: 0xHH The CobraNet module has a buddy link error. 0xHH is the hexadecimal error code. Refer to the CobraNet documentation on the CD-ROM that was supplied with your system for more information. Internal: Mute All audio inputs and audio inputs are muted. Internal: 0xHH The CobraNet module has a fault or an error. 0xHH is the hexadecimal error code. Refer to the CobraNet documentation on the CD-ROM that was supplied with your system for more information. Internal: Fatal The cobranet interface cannot start the firmware. No network The cobranet interface cannot find the optical network. When a fault condition is resolved, the fault message will disappear. The messages CobraNet: 0xHH, Internal: Mute, Internal: 0xHH, Internal: Fatal, and No network go out of view when you push the knob Fault status Use the 1 Fault Status menu item to see condition messages of the cobranet interface. If there is more than one message, the display shows the most important message (refer to table 13.8). table 13.8: Messages (low to high importance) Messages Description No Fault The cobranet interface operates correctly. Max. CH mismatch You have attached an audio input or audio output to a channel that does not exist. CobraNet: 0xHH The CobraNet module has a buddy link error. 0xHH is the hexadecimal error code. Refer to the CobraNet documentation on the CD-ROM that was supplied with your system for more information. Internal: Mute All audio inputs and audio inputs are muted. Internal: 0xHH The CobraNet module has a fault or an error. 0xHH is the hexadecimal error code. Refer to the CobraNet documentation on the CD-ROM that was supplied with your system for more information. Internal: Fatal The cobranet interface cannot start the firmware. No network The cobranet interface cannot find the optical network.

127 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Monitoring Use the 2 Monitoring menu item to open the Monitoring sub-menu (refer to table 13.9). table 13.9: Monitoring sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 2A Source/Volume 2B Input Engaged Audio input or output: In 1* In 2 In 3 In 4 Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Out 4 Audio input: 1, 2, 3, 4 Volume level: -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) -31 to 0 db (16 db*) The signal that is available on the headphones socket of the cobranet interface and its volume level. The menu item also shows the attached channel (read-only). If the menu item shows the number of the audio input, the channel on the audio input is already added to the system by another cobranet interface, a (digital) audio expander or an interpreter desk Enquiry Use the 3 Enquiry menu item to open the Enquiry sub-menu. The menu items in this sub-menu give general data about the cobranet interface (refer to table 13.10). This data must be mentioned in all service requests and failure reports. table 13.10: Enquiry sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value (read-only) Description 3A Serial Number --- e.g. 1C The hexadecimal serial number of the cobranet interface. 3B HW Version --- e.g The version number of the hardware of the cobranet interface. 3C FW Version --- e.g The version number of the firmware of the cobranet interface.

128 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Setup Use the 4 Setup menu item to open the Setup sub-menu. Use the menu items in this sub-menu to configure the cobranet interface (refer to table 13.11). To open the Setup sub-menu, you must push and hold the knob for more than 3 seconds. table 13.11: Setup sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4A AGC 4B Routing Input: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input/output: Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 AGC: On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Channel: --, 00 to 31 --, 00 to 31 --, 00 to 31 --, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 --, PA, 00 to 31 4C Unit Name --- Name: CobraNet* Custom name Sets the automatic gain control (AGC) of the audio inputs on and off (refer to section ). The channel that is attached to the audio input or audio output of the cobranet interface. (PA = public address system.) The name of the cobranet interface (max. 16 characters). 4D Defaults Opens the Reset menu item (refer to section ) Defaults Use the Defaults sub-menu to put back the default values for all parameters in the configuration menu (refer to table 13.12). table 13.12: Defaults sub-menu (* = default) Menu item Parameter Value Description 4D Reset to defaults No* Yes Does not put back the default values. Sets all parameters to the default values. The name is not changed.

129 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en Automatic gain control (AGC) Use the AGC menu item to enable or disable the AGC of the audio inputs. If necessary, enable the AGC for the audio inputs that inject external interpretations in the system. The AGC makes sure that the nominal level of the received interpretations is 9 dbv (XLR), -6 dbv (cinch). When the nominal input of an external interpretation is high, the audio of the external interpretations will be too loud compared to the audio of the internal interpretations from the interpreter desks. When channel 00 is attached to an audio input, the system automatically disables AGC for the audio input. You cannot manually enable AGC for an audio input to which channel 00 is attached Installation Install the CobraNet Discovery in a PC with the CD-ROM that is supplied with your system. The CD-ROM contains an automatic set-up program Start Make sure that the PC in which you installed the CobraNet Discovery is connected to the CobraNet network. On the PC, go to Start > Programs > CobraNet Discovery. The monitor of the PC shows the CobraNet(tm) Discovery window (refer to figure 13.7 for an example) Operation The CobraNet(tm) Discovery window (refer to figure 13.7) shows the CobraNet devices on the CobraNet network and their Ethernet parameters. The list also shows PC in which CobraNet Discovery is installed. If two systems are connected by audio connections (Cobranet, AEX, or DEX), set the AGC to off CobraNet Discovery Introduction With the CobraNet Discovery, you can: Find the IP addresses of the devices that are connected to the CobraNet network with a PC. Change the IP addresses of the devices that are connected to the CobraNet network with a PC. Change the firmware of the devices that are connected to the CobraNet network with a PC. We assume that you understand the basic theory of CobraNet networks. figure 13.7: CobraNet(tm) Discovery window The list contains these data: 1 S(tatus) - Shows the condition of the CobraNet device. If the status column contains a green checkmark, the device is active. If the status column contains a red cross, the device is not active or not connected to the network. 2 MAC Address - Shows the MAC address of the CobraNet device.

130 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en IP Address - Shows the IP address of the device. Usually, the IP address of new devices is CobraNet Discovery can automatically give addresses to new devices (refer to section ). 4 sysdescription - Shows the name and the firmware version of the CobraNet device. 5 errorcount - Shows the number of errors of the CobraNet device since you started CobraNet Discovery. To decrease the width of a column: 1 Click-and-hold the left mouse button on the right boundary of the column header. 2 Move the mouse to the left to decrease the width of the column. 3 Release the left mouse button. To increase the width of a column: 1 Click-and-hold the left mouse button on the right boundary of the column header. 2 Move the mouse to the right to increase the width of the column. 3 Release the left mouse button. To open the on-line help: Push the F1 function button on the keyboard of the PC in which the CobraNet Discovery was installed. Go to X:\Program Files\Peak Audio\CobraNet Discovery\CNDisco.chm. (X is the letter of the harddisk.) Configuration Overview With the Configuration window, you can configure CobraNet Discovery. To open the Configuration window, go to View > Options. figure 13.8: CobraNet(tm) Discovery window Network adapter In the Network Adapter block, you must choose the Ethernet card of the PC that is used to connect to the CobraNet network IP addresses When you put a checkmark in the Enable Auto Assignment box in the IP Address Range block, CobraNet Discovery automatically gives IP addresses to new CobraNet devices. You can set the range of automatically given IP addresses with the Start and End fields. When you remove the checkmark from the Enable Auto Assignment box, you will get access to the Start and End fields Firmware Normally the firmware does not need updating. If you do have to update the firmware, you must use the database location on the PC.

131 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en CNConfig Introduction With the CNConfig, you can change the values of CobraNet parameters of CobraNet devices with a PC. We assume that you understand the basic theory of CobraNet networks Installation Install the CNConfig in a PC with the CD-ROM that is supplied with your system. The CD-ROM contains an automatic set-up program Start Make sure that the PC in which you installed the CNConfig is connected to the CobraNet network. On the PC, go to Start > Programs > Bosch > CNConfig. The monitor of the PC shows the CobraNet Settings window (refer to figure 13.9 for an example) Operation Introduction The CobraNet Settings window (refer to figure 13.9) shows the CobraNet devices on the CobraNet network and their CobraNet parameters. figure 13.9: CobraNet Settings window To decrease the width of a column: 1 Click-and-hold the left mouse button on the right boundary of the column. 2 Move the mouse to the left to decrease the width of the column. 3 Release the left mouse button. To increase the width of a column: 1 Click-and-hold the left mouse button on the right boundary of the column. 2 Move the mouse to the right to increase the width of the column. 3 Release the left mouse button. To change the value of one parameter of a device: 1 Click on the device with the left mouse button. 2 Click on the parameter with the right mouse button. 3 Change the value of the parameter. To change the values of more than one parameter at the same time, use the Advanced configuration window (refer to figure 13.10). To open the on-line help: Push the F1 function button on the keyboard of the PC in which the CNConfig was installed. Go to X:\Program Files\Bosch\CNConfig and double-click with the left mouse button on CNConfig.chm. (X is the letter of the harddisk.) Configuration Introduction With the Advanced Configuration window (refer to figure 13.10), you can change the values of the CobraNet parameters of the CobraNet devices. To open the Advanced Configuration window, double-click on the CobraNet device in the CobraNet Settings window (refer to figure 13.9). Do not use the Advanced configuration window to give IP addresses to CobraNet devices. Always use CobraNet Discovery to give IP addresses to CobraNet devices.

132 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 132 Do as follows to configure a receiver bundle of the cobranet interface: 1 Go to the Advanced Configuration window (refer to figure 13.10) of CNConfig. 2 In the Bundle Number field of the receiver bundle, enter the number of the bundle that the receiver bundle must take from the CobraNet network (also refer to table 13.13). 3 Double-click on the first bundle channel (Ch 1) with the left mouse button. CNConfig shows an Rx Advanced Configuration window (refer to figure 13.11). With the Rx Advanced Configuration window, you can change the audio inputs that are connected to the bundle channels. figure 13.10: Advanced configuration window Conductor and clock When the CobraNet device is an LBB4404/00 CobraNet Interface, make sure that you set: Conductor clock to Internal clock Perform clock to Internal clock When the CobraNet device is an LBB4404/00 CobraNet Interface, these parameters are not applicable: Locked on external or network clock External synchronization present Conductor Priority Bundles Introduction The CobraNet network uses bundles for the transport of audio signals. The cobranet interface can: Receive 4 bundles from the CobraNet network (receiver bundles). Refer to the Receiver blocks in figure Send 4 bundles to the CobraNet network (transmitter bundles). Refer to the Transmitter blocks in figure Receiver bundles Each receiver bundle can have 8 bundle channels. To the bundle channels of a receiver bundle, you can connect the audio inputs of the cobranet interface. Thus, the audio inputs take audio signals from the CobraNet network and send them to the optical network. figure 13.11: Rx Advanced Configuration window 4 On the right of the Bundle Channel 1 block, click on the arrow button with the left mouse button. The CNConfig shows a list of audio inputs that you can connect to the bundle channel 1. 5 Click on the audio input that must be connected to the bundle channel. When the cobranet interface must not use the bundle channel, click on Unused with the left mouse button.

133 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 133 Do not connect an audio input to more than one bundle channel (in the same or one of the other receiver bundles). When you connect an audio input to more than one bundle channel, the system can operate incorrectly. Tx Advanced Configuration window (refer to figure 13.12). With the Tx Advanced Configuration window, you can change the audio outputs that are connected to the bundle channels. 6 Enter the values of the other parameters (for example, the bundle priority) of the receiver bundle (refer to the on-line help of the CNConfig). 7 Repeat step 4 to 6 for the other bundle channels in the receiver bundle. Transmitter bundles Each transmitter bundle can have 8 bundle channels. To the bundle channels of a transmitter bundle, you can connect the audio outputs of the cobranet interface. Thus, the audio outputs take audio signals from the optical network and send them to the CobraNet network. Do as follows to configure a transmitter bundle of the cobranet interface: 1 Go to the Advanced Configuration window (refer to figure 13.10) of CNConfig. 2 In the Bundle Number field of the transmitter bundle, enter the number of the bundle that the cobranet interface sends to the CobraNet network (refer to table in the on-line help of the CNConfig). table 13.13: Bundle numbers Bundle number Description 0 Bundle not in use. 1 to 255 Multicast bundle 256 to Unicast bundle When the CobraNet network must send the transmitter bundle to one other device on the CobraNet network, make sure that the transmitter bundle is a unicast bundle. figure 13.12: Tx Advanced Configuration window 4 On the right of the Bundle Channel 1 block, click on the arrow button with the left mouse button. The CNConfig shows a list of audio outputs that you can connect to the bundle channel 1. 5 Click on the audio output that must be connected to the bundle channel. When the cobranet interface must not use the bundle channel, click on Unused with the left mouse button. You can connect an audio output to more than one bundle channel. When you connect an audio output to more than one bundle channel, the system operates correctly. 6 Enter the values of the other parameters of the transmitter bundle (refer to the on-line help of the CNConfig). 7 Repeat step 4 to 6 for the other bundle channels in the transmitter bundle. 3 Double-click on the first bundle channel (Ch 1) with the left mouse button. CNConfig shows a

134 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Central Devices en 134 Intentionally left blank

135 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en 135 Section 3 - Contribution Devices

136 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en DCN-DIS Discussion Units 14.1 Introduction With the discussion units, the delegates can make contributions to a discussion. The chairman can use a discussion unit to monitor and control a discussion Controls, connectors and indicators Top The top of the discussion units (refer to figure 14.1 and figure 14.2) contains: 1 Microphone socket - Connects a DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone to the discussion unit (refer to chapter 17). You cannot connect a DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone to the DCN-DISL and DCN-DISS Discussion Units. The DCN-DISL and DCN-DISS Discussion Units have fixed microphones. 2 Loudspeaker - Gives the audio signal from the floor to the delegate or the chairman. When the microphone is enabled, the signal of the loudspeaker is muted. 3 Volume buttons - Change the volume level of the signal that is sent to the headphones. 4 Channel selector display - Shows the number of the channel and the abbreviation of the language (refer to appendix B) that is sent to the headphones. When the display shows FLR, the floor signal is sent to the headphones. 5 Channel selector buttons - Select the channel that is sent to the headphones. 6 Microphone buttons - Enable or disable the microphone. Each microphone button has a LED that shows the condition of the microphone. The mode of the discussion unit (refer to section ) gives the type and number of microphone buttons that you must install in the discussion unit. 7 Voting buttons - Operate the discussion unit. Each voting button has a yellow LED. The LED adjacent to voting button 1 is the attendance LED (refer to section ) Left and right sides The left and right sides of the discussion units (refer to figure 14.3) contain: 8 Headphones socket - Connect headphones to the discussion unit (refer to section ) Rear side The rear of the discussion units (refer to figure 14.4) contains: 9 DCN cable - Connects the discussion unit to the DCN (refer to section ). 10 DCN socket - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the discussion unit (refer to section ) Bottom side The bottom side of the discussion units (refer to figure 14.5) contains: 11 Screw holes - Attach the discussion unit to a flat surface (refer to section 14.5). 12 Configuration switches - Configure the discussion unit (refer to section 14.3) and set the mode of the discussion unit (refer to section 14.4). 13 De-init switch - Erases the address of the discussion unit (refer to section 8.7). All LEDs on the discussion unit come on when the discussion unit does not have an address. You can set change the type of language abbreviation with menu e of the installation menu of the interpreter desk (refer to section ).

137 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en 137 DCN-DISS, DCN-DISL DCN-DISD DCN-DISCS figure 14.1: Top views (1)

138 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en 138 DCN-DISDCS DCN-DISV DCN-DISVCS figure 14.2: Top views (2)

139 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en figure 14.3: Side views 8 figure 14.4: Rear view figure 14.5: Bottom view

140 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Internal settings Introduction With the configuration switches on the bottom of the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.5, no. 12), you can configure the discussion unit. The internal settings apply to the discussion unit. When the discussion unit is in the dual delegate mode (refer to section ), the internal settings are the same for the two delegates. table 14.1: Internal settings I II Internal setting 2 1 Microphone sensitivity (refer to section ). Default: 0 db. 2 2 Channel/volume restore function (refer to section ). Default: disabled. 2 3 Headphones level reduction (refer to section ) Default: disabled. The central control unit does not keep the internal settings of the discussion units. After you set the mode (refer to section 14.4), the discussion unit keeps the internal settings Microphone sensitivity When the configuration switches are in the correct position (refer to table 14.1), you can adjust the microphone sensitivity of the discussion unit between -2 db and 2 db. To increase the microphone sensitivity with 0.5 db, push the > volume button. To decrease the microphone sensitivity with -0.5 db, push the < volume button. The color of microphone button LED indicates the microphone sensitivity (see table 14.2). table 14.2 Microphone sensitivity adjustment Value in db Color of microphone button LED Red Off Orange Off 0.0 Yellow 0.5 Off 1.0 Light green 1.5 Off 2.0 Green When the discussion unit has two sets of volume buttons, configure the microphone sensitivity with the right set of volume buttons. The microphone sensitivity cannot be configured with the left set of volume buttons.

141 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Channel/volume restore function When the configuration switches are in the correct position (refer to table 14.1), you can enable or disable the channel/volume restore function of the discussion unit. To enable the channel/volume restore function, push the > volume button. (The LED around the microphone buttons come on as green.) When the discussion unit is enabled, it automatically selects the last known channel and volume. To disable the channel/volume restore function, push the < volume button. (The LED around the left microphone button comes on as red.) When the discussion unit is enabled, it automatically selects channel 0 (floor) and sets the volume to -18 db. When the discussion unit has two sets of volume buttons, configure the channel/volume restore function with the right set of volume buttons. The channel/volume restore function cannot be configured with the left set of volume buttons. For example, you can enable this function in discussions in which all delegates and chairmen have a fixed seat number Headphones level reduction When the configuration switches are in the correct position (refer to table 14.1), you can enable or disable the headphones level reduction of the discussion unit. To enable the headphones level reduction, push the > volume button. (The LED around the left microphone button comes on as green.) When the microphone is enabled, the headphones level reduction is 18 db. When the discussion unit is in the dual delegate mode (refer to section ) and the headphones level reduction is enabled: The signal that is sent to the left headphones socket is decreased when the left microphone button is pushed. The signal that is sent to the right headphones socket is not decreased. The signal that is sent to the right headphones socket is decreased when the right microphone button is pushed. The signal that is sent to the left headphones socket is not decreased. To disable the headphones level reduction, push the < volume button. (The LED around the left microphone button comes on as red.) When the microphone is enabled, there is no headphones level reduction. When the discussion unit has two sets of volume buttons, configure the headphones level reduction with the right set of volume buttons. The headphones level reduction cannot be configured with the left set of volume buttons. For example, you can enable this function to avoid acoustic feedback between the microphone and the headphones of the discussion unit.

142 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Modes Overview With the configuration switches on the bottom of the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.5, no. 12), you can configure the mode of the discussion unit. Each type of discussion unit can operate in a number of modes (refer to table 14.3). table 14.3: Modes I II Mode 1 1 Single delegate (refer to section ) 1 3 Chairman (refer to section ) 3 1 Dual delegate (refer to section ) 3 3 Single delegate with auxiliary control (refer to section ) Single delegate When the discussion unit is in the single delegate mode, it is a delegate device for 1 delegate. You can put all types of discussion units in the single delegate mode. When you put the discussion unit in the single delegate mode, you must also install the default microphone buttons (refer to figure 14.6 and section ) Chairman When the discussion unit is in the chairman mode, it is a chairman device for 1 chairman. You can put all types of discussion units in the chairman mode. When you put the discussion unit in the chairman mode, you must also install the DCN-DISBCM Buttons (refer to figure 14.7 and section ). figure 14.7: DCN-DISBCM Buttons The only difference between a delegate discussion unit and a chairman discussion unit is the priority button on the left of the microphone button. With the priority button, the chairman can disable the microphones of all delegate devices. At the same time, the priority button enables the microphone of the chairman. The system has the possibility to: Play an attention chime when the chairman pushes the priority button (refer to section 8.8.3). Erase the request-to-speak list and the speakers list when the chairman pushes the priority button (refer to section 8.8.4). figure 14.6: Default microphone button The DCN-DISBCM button come with a tool that you can use to remove the old buttons from the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.11). All discussion units are delivered with the default microphone button.

143 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Dual delegate When the discussion unit is in the dual delegate mode, it is a delegate device for 2 delegates. The system sees the discussion unit as two separate devices, but it gives only one address to the discussion unit. You can only put these types of discussion units in the dual delegate mode: DCN-DISD DCN-DISDCS When you put the discussion unit in the dual delegate mode, you must also install the DCN-DISBDD Buttons (refer to figure 14.8 and section ). You can only put these types of discussion units in the single delegate with auxiliary control mode: DCN-DISD DCN-DISDCS DCN-DISV DCN-DISVCS When you put the discussion unit in the single delegate with auxiliary control mode, you must also install two microphone buttons (refer to section ). For example, you can use the DCN-DISBCM Buttons (refer to figure 14.7) Installation Rims The discussion units are delivered without rims. Before you install the discussion unit, you must first attach a DCN-DISR Rim to it. With the rims, you can change the look of the discussion unit. figure 14.8: DCN-DISBDD Buttons The DCN-DISBDD buttons come with a tool that you can use to remove the old buttons from the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.11). Refer to figure 14.9 for instructions that tell you how to attach a rim to a discussion unit. Refer to figure for instructions that tell you how to detach a rim from a discussion unit Single delegate with auxiliary control When the discussion unit is in the single delegate with auxiliary control mode, it is a delegate device for 1 delegate. The delegate can use the left microphone button as an auxiliary button. For example, to activate an indicator. When the delegate pushes the auxiliary button, the auxiliary button makes an event. Use the Open Interface to program the actions that must be started by the event. Refer to the applicable Software User Manual for instructions that tell you how to program the Open Interface. figure 14.9: Attach a rim

144 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en 144 TORX 8 TORX figure 14.10: Detach a rim

145 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Microphone buttons The mode of the discussion unit (refer to section 14.4) gives the type and number of microphone buttons that you must install in the discussion unit DCN cable You can move the DCN cable from the rear side to the bottom side of the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.13). Refer to figure for instructions that tell you how to remove microphone buttons from a discussion unit. TORX figure 14.13: Move the DCN cable Discussion unit figure 14.11: Remove microphone buttons Refer to figure for instructions that tell you how to install microphone buttons on a discussion unit. The safety of this equipment has been tested according to the standards for moveable equipment. Before you use this equipment as stationary equipment in a North American country, contact your supplier. Install the discussion unit on a flat surface or in a recess (refer to figure 14.14). When you install the discussion unit desk in a recess: Use the template (refer to figure 14.15). Move the DCN cable to the bottom side of the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.13). When you install the discussion unit in a recess, make sure that the delegates or the chairman can connect the headphones. figure 14.12: Install microphone buttons

146 R (2x) +2 0 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en mm table 14.4: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 60 x 190 x 120 mm Weight: DCN-DISL: 0.9 kg DCN-DISS: 0.9 kg DCN-DISCS: 0.8 kg DCN-DISD: 0.8 kg DCN-DISDCS: 0.8 kg DCN-DISV: 0.8 kg DCN-DISVCS: 0.8 kg When you attach the discussion unit to a flat surface, put screws with a length of 8 mm in the screw holes (refer to figure 14.5, no. 11). The distance between the centres of the screw holes is 34 mm. figure 14.14: Installation R43.8 (4x) R73.8 (2x) figure 14.15: Template (refer to the CD-ROM that is supplied with the system for a *.dwg file)

147 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en External connections DCN Connect the discussion unit to the DCN with the DCN cable. You can use the DCN socket to make a loop-through with the discussion unit. table 14.5: DCN connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Location: Rear side (default) Power consumption: DCN-DISL: 2.75 W DCN-DISS: 2.75 W DCN-DISCS: 2.9 W DCN-DISD: 2.8 W DCN-DISDCS: 3.15 W DCN-DISV: 3.05 W DCN-DISVCS: 3.20 W You can use the cable-to-unit clamps to lock DCN cables to discussion units (refer to figure 14.16). 1 2 figure 14.16: Cable-to-unit clamp You can move the DCN cable from the rear side to the bottom side of the discussion unit (refer to figure 14.13).

148 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones socket of the discussion unit, the headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 14.17) figure 14.17: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 14.6: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right You can also connect mono headphones to the discussion unit. table 14.7: Headphones sockets, details Number of connections: 2x 3.5 mm socket Location: Right and left sides 14.7 Operation Microphone The colors of the LEDs of the microphone buttons show the condition of the microphone that is connected to the discussion unit (refer to table 15.12). table 14.8: Condition Color Condition Red (on) Microphone enabled Red (flash) Last minute of speech time Green (on) Request-to-speak Green (flash) First in request-to-speak list Yellow (on) VIP mode You can only put the discussion unit in the VIP mode with the Microphone Management software module. Refer to the applicable Software User Manual for instructions that tell you how to enable the VIP mode. Refer to the Quick Reference Card of the discussion unit for instructions that tell you how to operate the discussion unit Attendance LED table 14.9: Attendance LED Attendance LED Condition Yellow (on) Delegate present

149 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en DCN-CON Concentus Delegate Units 15.1 Introduction With the DCN-CON, DCN-CONCS and DCN-CONFF Concentus Delegate Units, the delegates can make contributions to a conference Controls, connectors and indicators Top The top of the Concentus delegate units (refer to figure 15.1) contains: 1 Microphone socket - Connects a DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone to the Concentus delegate unit (refer to chapter 17). 2 Loudspeaker - Gives the audio signal from the floor to the delegate. When the microphone is enabled, the signal of the loudspeaker is muted. 3 Microphone LED - Comes on when the microphone is enabled. 4 Card reader - Can give access to the Concentus delegate unit. 5 Channel selector - Selects the channel that is sent to the headphones. 6 Microphone button - Enables or disables the microphone. The microphone button has a LED that shows the condition of the microphone (refer to section 15.6). 7 Voting buttons - Operate the Concentus delegate unit. Each voting button has a yellow LED. The LED shows the condition of the voting button. 8 Display - Shows the menu of the Concentus delegate unit Left and right sides The left and right sides of the Concentus delegate units (refer to figure 15.2) contain: 9 External microphone socket - Connects an external microphone or the microphone of a headset to the left side of the Concentus delegate unit (refer to section ). 10 Headphones sockets - Connect headphones to the Concentus delegate unit (refer to section ). Each side has one headphones socket. 11 Volume controls - Adjust the volume level of the signal that is sent to the headphones Bottom side The bottom side of the Concentus delegate units (refer to figure 15.3 and figure 15.4) contains: 12 Screws - Connect the bottom plate to the cover of the Concentus delegate unit. 13 DCN cable - Connects the Concentus delegate unit to the DCN (refer to section ). 14 DCN socket - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the Concentus delegate unit (refer to section ). 15 Sensitivity potentiometer - Adjusts the sensitivity of the microphone that is connected to the Concentus delegate unit (+/- 2 db). 16 RJ45 socket - Connects an LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset, external contact or DCM-FCS Channel Selector to the Concentus delegate unit (refer to section , section and section ). 17 Screw holes - Attach the Concentus delegate unit to a flat surface (refer to section 15.4). 18 De-init switch - Erases the address of the Concentus delegate unit (refer to section 8.7). All LEDs on the Concentus delegate unit come on when the Concentus delegate unit does not have an address.

150 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en 150 DCN-CON DCN-CONCS DCN-CONFF figure 15.1: Top views The Concentus conference units have pimples, which blind delegates and chairman can use to locate voting button 3.

151 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en 151 DCN-CONCS, DCN-CONFF figure 15.3: Bottom view (1) figure 15.2: Side views figure 15.4: Bottom view (2) 18

152 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Internal settings Introduction The component side of the primary PCB of the Concentus delegate units (refer to figure 15.5) contains solder spots. With these solder spots, you can configure the Concentus delegate unit. table 15.1: Solder spots Solder spot Function S300 Restore channel function (refer to section ). S302 Auto standby function (refer to section ). S303 Headphones level reduction (refer to section ). Remove the screws (refer figure 15.3 no. 12) to get access to the primary PCB. Caution Before you open the Concentus delegate unit, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges. S300 S302 S303 figure 15.5: Internal top view

153 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Restore channel function Use the S300 solder spot to enable or disable the restore channel function of the channel selector of the Concentus delegate unit Auto standby function Use the S302 solder spot to enable or disable the auto standby function of the channel selector of the Concentus delegate unit. The DCN-CON does not have a channel selector. The DCN-CON does not have a channel selector. table 15.2: Solder spot S300 (* = default) Solder spot Description Not soldered* The restore channel function is disabled. When the channel selector is enabled, it automatically selects channel 0 (the floor) Soldered The restore channel function is enabled. When the channel selector is enabled, it automatically selects last known channel. For example, you can enable this function when all delegates and chairmen have a fixed seat number. table 15.3: Solder spot S302 (* = default) Solder spot Function Not soldered* The auto standby function is enabled. When the headphones are disconnected, the channel selector is disabled. Soldered The auto standby function is disabled. When the headphones are disconnected, the channel selector remains enabled. The Concentus delegate unit detects the presence of the headphones with a switch inside the headphones socket. When the headphones are connected, the switch is closed. The Concentus delegate unit saves all channel changes after 5 seconds. When the last know channel number is greater than the maximum number of channels that are available, the channel selector automatically goes to channel 0. When the last known channel becomes available, it is only restored when you did not operate the buttons of the channel selector.

154 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Headphones level reduction Use the S303 solder spot to enable or disable the headphones level reduction of the headphones that are connected to the Concentus delegate unit. table 15.4: Solder spot S303 (* = default) Solder spot Function Not soldered* The headphones level reduction is disabled. When the red LED ring of the microphone comes on, there is no headphones level reduction. Soldered The headphones level reduction is enabled. When the red LED ring of the microphone comes on, the headphones level reduction is 18 db. For example, you can enable this function to avoid acoustic feedback between the microphone and the headphones of the Concentus delegate unit. To show that there is only one minute of time left for the current speaker, the red LED ring can flash. During this period, the headphones level reduction remains enabled Installation The safety of this equipment has been tested according to the standards for moveable equipment. Before you use this equipment as stationary equipment in a North American country, contact your supplier. Install the Concentus delegate unit on a flat surface or in a recess (refer to figure 15.6). When you install the Concentus delegate unit in a recess, use the template (refer to figure 15.7) to make the correct contour. table 15.5: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 50 x 275 x 155 mm (table-top) 30 x 275 x 155 mm (flush-mounted) Weight: approximately 1.5 kg You can attach the Concentus delegate unit to the bottom of the recess. Put screws with a length of 6.5 mm in the screw holes (refer to figure 15.4, no. 17). The distance between the centres of the screw holes is 100 mm. 20 mm figure 15.6: Installation

155 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en External connections DCN Connect the Concentus delegate unit to the DCN with the DCN cable. You can use the DCN socket to make a loop-through with the Concentus delegate unit. table 15.6: DCN connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Location: Bottom side Power consumption: DCN-CON: 3.4 W DCN-CONCS: 3.7 W DCN-CONFF: 4.2 W DCN-CONCM: 4.2 W 266 R 696.5(2x) R995.5 R 2.5(2x) R 3.5(2x) R (2x) R 3.5(2x) center line for R M 3 (2x) center line for R R 495.5(2x) (2x) Dim for center R696.5 R5.5 R700.5 figure 15.7: Template (refer to the CD-ROM that is supplied with the system for a *.dwg file)

156 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en External microphone You can connect an external microphone to the external microphone socket of the Concentus delegate unit (refer to figure 15.8) Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones sockets of the Concentus delegate unit. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 15.9). The DCN-CON does not have a socket for an external microphone. The DCN-CON does not have headphones sockets figure 15.8: 3.5 mm microphone plug, connection table 15.7: 3.5 mm microphone plug, connection Number Signal 1 Microphone signal + 2 Microphone GND 3 Not connected (optional GND) When you connect a headset to the Concentus delegate unit, you must connect the microphone of the headset to the external microphone socket. The Concentus delegate unit senses that an external microphone is connected to the external microphone socket. The Concentus delegate unit internally disconnects the DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone (if connected). table 15.8: External microphone socket, details Number of connections: 1x 3.5 mm socket Location: Left side Audio levels: Refer to appendix A figure 15.9: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 15.9: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right You can also connect mono headphones to the Concentus delegate unit. When you connect a headset to the Concentus delegate unit, use the headphones socket on the left side. Adjacent to this headphones socket is an external microphone socket. Connect the microphone of the headset to this external microphone socket (refer to section ). table 15.10: Headphones sockets, details Number of connections: 2x 3.5 mm sockets Location: Left and right sides

157 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en Intercom handset You can connect an LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset to the Concentus delegate unit. The intercom handset must be connected to the RJ45 socket (refer to figure and table 15.11) External contact You can connect an external contact to the Concentus delegate unit. The external contact must be connected between pin 5 and pin 8 of the RJ45 socket (refer to figure 15.11). 1 8 figure 15.10: RJ45 socket, connection table 15.11: RJ45 socket, connection Pin Signal 1 Headphones level reduction 2 Microphone, ground 3 Microphone, in 4 Earpiece, positive 5 Earpiece, ground 6 Hook switch 7 Hook switch 8 External contact The external contact is only available in systems that operate with a control PC that has one or more of these software modules: Parliamentary Voting software module Multi Voting software module Attendance Registration software module Refer to the applicable Software User Manuals for the instructions that tell you how to use the external contact. The LBB3555/00 Intercom Headset has a RJ11 plug (refer to chapter 18). This plug fits in the center of the RJ45 socket on the Concentus delegate unit. Pin 1 and pin 8 of the RJ45 socket (refer to figure 15.10) are not used. External < 0.5 m V3 R figure 15.11: External contact, connection

158 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en DCN-FCS Headphones level reduction When you use a Concentus delegate unit with a DCN-FCS Channel Selector, you must connect pin 1 and 5 of the RJ45 socket (refer to figure and table 15.11) to the level reduction plug of the channel selector (refer to figure 15.12). This prevents acoustic feedback. RJ DCN-CON DCN-FCS figure 15.12: Channel selector, connection Operation The color of the LED of the microphone button shows the condition of the microphone that is connected to the Concentus delegate unit (refer to table 15.12). table 15.12: Condition Color Condition Red (on) Microphone enabled Red (flash) Last minute of speech time Green (on) Request-to-speak Green (flash) First in request-to-speak list Yellow (on) VIP mode You can only put the Concentus delegate unit in the VIP mode with the Microphone Management software module. Refer to the applicable Software User Manual for instructions that tell you how to enable the VIP mode. When the microphone that is connected to the Concentus delegate unit is enabled, the channel selector automatically decreases the volume level of the signal that is sent to the headphones of the channel selector. Refer to the Quick Reference Card of the Concentus delegate unit for instructions that tell you how to operate the Concentus delegate unit.

159 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en DCN-CONCM Concentus Chairman Unit 16.1 Introduction With the DCN-CONCM Concentus Chairman Unit, the chairman can monitor and control a conference Controls, connectors and indicators The only difference between the Concentus chairman unit and the Concentus delegate unit is the priority button on the left of the microphone button (refer to figure 16.1) Internal settings Refer to section 15.3 for information about the internal settings of the Concentus chairman unit. The internal settings of the Concentus delegate unit and the Concentus chairman unit are the same Installation Refer to section 15.4 for information about the installation of the Concentus chairman unit. The procedures to install the Concentus delegate unit and the Concentus chairman unit are the same External connections Refer to section 15.5 for information about the external connections of the Concentus chairman unit. The external connections of the Concentus delegate unit and the Concentus chairman unit are the same Operation The color of the LED of the microphone button shows the condition of the microphone that is connected to the Concentus chairman unit (refer to table 15.12). figure 16.1: Priority and microphone buttons With the priority button, the chairman can disable the microphones of all delegate devices. At the same time, the priority button enables the microphone of the chairman. The system has the possibility to: Play an attention chime when the chairman pushes the priority button (refer to section 8.8.3). Erase the request-to-speak list and the speakers list when the chairman pushes the priority button (refer to section 8.8.4). table 16.1: Condition Color Condition Red (on) Microphone enabled Refer to the Quick Reference Card of the Concentus chairman unit for instructions that tell you how to operate the Concentus chairman unit.

160 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en DCN-MICL, DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphones 17.1 Introduction The DCN-MICL and DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphones (refer to table 17.1 and table 17.2) are used with the contribution and interpretation devices (refer to table 17.3) Controls, connectors and indicators The pluggable microphone (refer to figure 17.1) contains: 1 Indicator ring - Shows the condition of the microphone (refer to section 17.4). 2 Union nut - Attaches the pluggable microphone to the device. 3 Microphone plug - Connects the microphone to devices (refer to section 17.3). table 17.1: Types and lengths Type Length (mm) DCN-MICS 310 DCN-MICL 480 table 17.2: Electrical and acoustic properties Nominal level: 85 db SPL Maximum level: 110 db SPL at < 3% THD Transducer type: Electret Directional pattern: Cardioid Equivalent input noise level: 24 db(a) Power consumption: 0.25 W 1 table 17.3: Compatible devices Type Description DCN-IDESK Interpreter Desk DCN-FMIC Microphone Connection Panel DCN-CON Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONCS Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONFF Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONCM Concentus Chairman Unit DCN-DISD Discussion Unit DCN-DISCS Discussion Unit DCN-DISDCS Discussion Unit DCN-DISV Discussion Unit DCN-DISVCS Discussion Unit figure 17.1: Overview 2 3

161 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en External connections Connect the pluggable microphone to compatible devices with the microphone plug (refer to figure 17.2) figure 17.2: Microphone plug, connection table 17.4: Microphone plug, connection Pin Signal 1 Indicator ring, red (cathode) 2 Indicator ring common (anode) 3 Microphone signal + 4 Microphone GND 5 Shielding 6 Indicator ring, green (cathode) 17.4 Operation The color of the indicator ring shows the condition of the microphone (refer to table 17.5). table 17.5: Condition Color Condition Red (on) Microphone enabled Red (flash) Last minute of speech time Green (on) Request-to-speak Green (flash) First in request-to-speak list When the microphone is connected to a DCN-IDESK, it can only show that the microphone is enabled.

162 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Contribution Devices en LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset The LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset (refer to figure 18.1) is used along with contribution devices (refer to table 18.1). With the intercom handset, delegates and the chairman can speak to the operator (the person who controls the system). When the Intercom software module is installed, the delegates can also speak with each other. Connect the intercom plug of the intercom handset (refer to figure 18.2) to the intercom socket of a compatible device. 6 1 figure 18.2: Intercom plug (RJ11), connection table 18.2: Intercom plug (RJ11), connection Pin Signal 1 Microphone, ground 2 Microphone, in 3 Earpiece, positive 4 Earpiece, negative 5 Hook switch 6 Hook switch figure 18.1: Intercom handset table 18.1: Compatible devices Type Description DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface DCN-CON Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONCS Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONFF Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONCM Concentus Chairman Unit

163 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 163 Section 4 - Flush-mounted Devices

164 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Installation 19.1 Introduction You can install flush-mounted devices in a recess in a flat surface (for example, table-tops, armrests of seats) Methods 19.3 Recesses Snap mounting Refer to figure 19.2 for the dimensions of a recess for the snap-mounting method Snap-mounting Use the snap-mounting method to install flush-mounted devices in panels with a thickness of 2 mm. The snap-mounting method uses the click-to-fit mechanism of the flush-mounted devices (refer to figure 19.1). You can click the flush-mounted devices in the recess. R x figure 19.2: Recess, snap-mounting method The length (x) of a recess depends on the number-size factor (NSF) of the flush-mounted device that must be installed in the recess. To get the length of a recess: 1 Get the number-size factor (NSF) of the flush-mounted device from table Use the NSF to get the length (x) of the recess from table figure 19.1: Click-to-fit mechanism table 19.1: Lengths, snap-mounting method Total NSF x (mm) Block-mounting Use the block-mounting method to install flush-mounted devices in surfaces with a thickness > 2 mm. The block-mounting method uses the DCN-FEC End Caps, DCN-FCOUP Couple Pieces and DCN-FPT Flush Positioning Tool (refer to figure 19.4 and figure 19.5 for an example). Use a filling knife to remove flush-mounted devices from a surface.

165 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Block-mounting Refer to figure 19.2 for the dimensions of a recess for the block-mounting method. R Number-size factor The length of a recess depends on: The number of flush-mounted devices that are installed in the recess. The size of the flush-mounted devices that are installed in the recess To calculate the length of a recess, you must use the number-size factor (NSF, refer to table 19.3) of the flush-mounted devices. x figure 19.3: Recess, block-mounting method The length (x) of a recess depends on the total number-size factor (NSF) of the flush-mounted devices that must be installed in the recess. To calculate the length of a recess: 1 For each flush-mounted device, get the number-size factor (NSF) from table Add the NSFs of the flush-mounted devices to get the total NSF. 3 Use the total NSF to get the length (x) of the recess from table The length includes the DCN-FCOUP couple pieces. table 19.3: Number-size factors Flush-mounted device NSF DCN-FCS 2 DCN-FLSP 2 DCN-FMIC 1 DCN-FMICB 1 DCN-FPRIOB 1 DCN-FV 2 DCN-FVCRD 2 DCN-FVU 2 DCN-FVU-CN 2 Install DCN-FEC End Caps on the couple pieces at the two ends of the recess. table 19.2: Lengths, block-mounting method Total NSF x (mm)

166 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 166 TORX 8 TORX 8 figure 19.4: Example, block mounting method

167 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en TORX figure 19.5: Example, block mounting (continued) 09 10

168 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FPT Flush Positioning Tool When you use the block-mounting method to install flush-mounted devices, you can use the DCN-FPT Flush Positioning Tool (refer figure 20.1) to measure the distance between two couple pieces. figure 20.1: Flush positioning tool

169 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface 21.1 Introduction Use the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface to make contribution devices with flush-mounted devices Controls, connectors and indicators The dual delegate interface (refer to figure 21.1) contains: 1 DCN cable - Connects the dual delegate interface to the DCN (refer to section ). 2 Mode selector - Sets the mode in which the dual delegate interface operates (refer to section 21.4). 3 Intercom socket - Connects an LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset to the dual delegate interface (refer to section ). 4 Voting/Control inputs - Connect DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panels, DCN-FPRIOB Microphone Priority Panels and DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panels to the dual delegate interface (refer to section ). 5 Lid - Gives access to the controls inside (refer to section 21.3). 6 Audio inputs - Connect external audio sources to the dual delegate interface (refer to section ). 7 Audio outputs - Connect loudspeakers to the dual delegate interface (refer to section ). 8 DCN socket - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the dual delegate interface (refer section ) figure 21.1: Dual delegate interface

170 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Internal settings Remove the lid of the dual delegate interface to get access to the controls inside (refer to figure 21.2). figure 21.2: Internal settings 1 db P12 / +/-3dB 9 De-init switch - Erases the address of the dual delegate interface (refer to section 8.7). The red LED adjacent to the de-init switch comes on when the dual delegate interface does not have an address. 10 Input adjustment potentiometer - Adjusts the sensitivity of the audio input. 11 Input type switch - Sets the type of audio input (refer to table 21.1). table 21.1: Input type switch (* = default) Position Description Upper Balanced signal with phantom power Center Balanced signal without phantom power Lower Unbalanced signal* 12 Input adjustment switch - Sets the sensitivity of the audio input. 13 Signal level switch - Sets the signal level of the audio input (refer to table 21.2). 2 db P12 / 13 +/-3dB Configuration Introduction The number and types of (flush-mounted) devices that you can connect to the dual delegate interface depends on the selected mode. You can set the mode with the mode selector (refer to table 21.3). table 21.3: Modes (* = default) No. Mode 0* Dual delegate 1 Chairman 2 Dual delegate with one microphone 3 Dual delegate with muted loudspeakers 4 Single delegate 5 Entrance unit 6 Exit unit 7 Ambient microphone Dual delegate When the dual delegate interface is in the dual delegate mode, it is a delegate device for 2 delegates. The system sees the dual delegate interface as two separate devices, but it gives only one address to the dual delegate interface. Refer to figure 21.4 for a typical example. When audio input 1 is enabled, the dual delegate interface disables audio output 1. When audio input 2 is enabled, the dual delegate interface disables audio output Chairman When the dual delegate interface is in the chairman mode, it acts as a chairman device for 1 chairman. You can connect 2 audio inputs in the chairman mode. Refer to figure 21.5 for a typical example. table 21.2: Signal level switch (* = default) Position Description Left Line level signal Right Microphone signal*

171 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Dual delegate, one microphone When the dual delegate interface is in the dual delegate with one microphone mode, it acts as a delegate device for 2 delegates, who share 1 audio input. The two delegates can enable or disable the audio input with their own microphone buttons. Refer to figure 21.6 for a typical example. You must close the solder spot of the DCN-FMIC (refer to section 22.3) when: You connect a DCN-FMIC to the dual delegate interface and The dual delegate interface is in the dual delegate with one microphone mode Dual delegate with both loudspeakers muted This mode is the same as the dual delegate mode (see section ), but both loudspeakers are muted when one of the microphones is active. This prevents unnecessary feedback in the system. Refer to figure 21.4 for a typical example Single delegate When the dual delegate interface is in the single delegate mode, it acts as a delegate device for 1 delegate. Refer to figure 21.7 for a typical example. You can connect an optional DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panel. The delegate can use the microphone control panel as an auxiliary button. For example, to activate an indicator. The delegate can push the auxiliary button to start an event. Use the Open Interface to program the event (refer to the applicable Software User Manual) Loudspeakers always active By default the loudspeaker is muted when the corresponding microphone is active. This prevents unnecessary feedback in the system. However, to deactivate muting, connect the solder spots for the relevant loudspeaker (refer to table 21.4 and figure 21.3). table 21.4: Solder spots Solder spot Open Soldered (X13) (X12) X12 X13 Left loudspeaker muted when microphone active Right loudspeaker muted when microphone active figure 21.3: Internal top view X12 X13 Left loudspeaker always active Right loudspeaker always active C192 R303 R304 R302 R Entrance unit When the dual delegate interface is in the entrance unit mode, it acts as a device that is used at the entrance of the room to create a presence list. Refer to figure 21.8 for a typical example. X9 X8 X2 X11 X10 V85 D20 V86 R157 C58 R293 V65 C59 L27 V63 V60 L26 L24 BLUE WHITE SCREEN V88 V87 L19 R76 C270 R144 R155 D22 L29 R243 V62 V61 R245 L28 L25 R158 C C141 R239 S4 S3 B1 L7 C167 L40 V67 L34 L42 C253 V68 L36 C91 R219 C121 C119 C248 L41 C226 L35 R R Exit unit When the dual delegate interface is in the exit unit mode, it acts as a device that is used at the exit of the room to keep the presence list complete. Refer to figure 21.8 for a typical example.

172 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Ambient microphone When the dual delegate interface is in the ambient microphone mode, the signal of the connected audio input is sent to the floor when all other microphones in the system are disabled. Refer to figure 21.9 for a typical example. The connected DCN-FMICB cannot enable or disable the audio input. You can use the connected DCN-FMICB to give an address to the delegate interface (refer to section 8.7).

173 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 173 DCN-FMIC DCN-FMIC 6-p CT 6-p CT 8-p DIN 8-p DIN RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FV(CRD) DCN-FV(CRD) RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FMICB DCN-FMICB DCN-DDI DCN-FLSP DCN-FLSP 3.5 mm 3.5 mm 1 2 figure 21.4: Dual delegate mode (0) and Dual delegate with both loudspeakers muted mode (3) DCN-FMIC DCN-FMIC 6-p CT 6-p CT 8-p DIN 8-p DIN RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FV(CRD) RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FPRIOB DCN-FMICB DCN-DDI DCN-FLSP DCN-FLSP 3.5 mm 3.5 mm 1 2 RJ11 RJ11 LBB3555/00 figure 21.5: Chairman mode (1) Optional DCN-FMIC 6-p CT 8-p DIN RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FV(CRD) DCN-FV(CRD) RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FMICB DCN-FMICB DCN-DDI DCN-FLSP DCN-FLSP 3.5 mm 3.5 mm 1 2 figure 21.6: Dual delegate mode, one microphone mode (2)

174 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 174 DCN-FMIC DCN-FMIC 6-p CT 6-p CT 8-p DIN 8-p DIN RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FV(CRD) DCN-FMICB DCN-FMICB DCN-DDI DCN-FLSP DCN-FLSP 3.5 mm 3.5 mm 1 2 RJ11 RJ11 LBB3555/00 figure 21.7: Single delegate mode (4) Optional 1 2 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FVCRD DCN-FVCRD DCN-DDI DCN-FLSP 3.5 mm 3.5 mm 1 2 DCN-FLSP figure 21.8: Entrance unit mode and exit unit mode (5 and 6) Optional DCN-FMIC 6-p CT 8-p DIN RJ11 RJ11 DCN-FMICB DCN-DDI DCN-FLSP DCN-FLSP 3.5 mm 3.5 mm 1 2 figure 21.9: Ambient microphone mode (7) Optional

175 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Installation Install the dual delegate interface on a flat surface (refer to figure 21.10). Use the lid of the dual delegate interface to fix the positions of the DCN cables and the cables of the audio inputs and audio outputs. The DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface is not a flush-mounted device External connections DCN Connect the dual delegate interface to the DCN with the DCN cable. You can use the DCN socket to make a loop-through with the dual delegate interface. table 21.6: DCN connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Location: Bottom side Power consumption: 2.2 W (4.5 W) figure 21.10: Installation table 21.5: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): x 100 x 35 mm Weight: 580 g The power consumption of 4.5 W includes the power consumption of all flush-mounted devices that you can connect to the dual delegate interface. These are: DCN-FLSP DCN-FMIC DCN-FMICB DCN-FPRIOB DCN-FV DCN-FVCRD

176 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Audio outputs You can connect loudspeakers to the audio outputs of the dual delegate interface. The loudspeakers must have 3.5 mm plugs (refer to figure 21.11). figure 21.11: 3.5 mm loudspeaker plug, connection table 21.7: 3.5 mm loudspeaker plug, connection Number Signal Not used 3 - Typically, you will connect DCN-FLSP Loudspeaker Panels (refer to chapter 22) to the audio outputs. table 21.8: Audio output details Number of connections: 2x 3.5 mm socket Location: Left side Cable: Shielded cable Audio levels: Refer to appendix A Load impedance: > 8 Ω Crosstalk between outputs: > 40 db Intercom handset You can connect an LBB3555/00 Intercom Handset to the dual delegate interface. The intercom handset must be connected to the intercom socket Voting/Control inputs You can use the voting/control inputs to connect these devices to the dual delegate interface: DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panel DCN-FPRIOB Priority Panel DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panel Audio inputs You can connect microphone or line level signals to the audio inputs of the dual delegate interface. The audio inputs have DIN-8p-262 sockets (refer to figure 21.12) figure 21.12: Audio input, connection 6 table 21.9: Audio input, connection Pin Signal 1 Signal in, + 2 Microphone, common 3 Signal in, - 4 Microphone LED (max. 2 ma) 5 Request-to-speak LED (max. 7 ma) 6 Microphone button V(DC) (max. 20 ma) 8 LED ring control table 21.10: Connections Pin Component 4 (-) to 7 (+) Microphone on LED 5 (-) to 7 (+) Request-to-speak LED 6 to 7 Momentarily microphone switch

177 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 177 Typically, you will connect DCN-FMIC Microphone Connection Panels (refer to chapter 19) to the audio inputs. table 21.11: Audio inputs Number of connections: 2x DIN-8p-262 sockets Location: Left side Cable: Shielded cable Audio levels: Refer to appendix A Impedance: Selectable: Asymmetric mic.: > 4 kω Symmetrical dynamic mic.: > 2 x 33 kω Symmetrical phantom mic.: > 2 x 680 Ω Phantom supply: 12 V(DC) ± 10%, max. 15 ma Signal-to-noise ratio: > 90 db CMRR: > 85 max. level Crosstalk between inputs: > 40 db

178 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FMIC Microphone Connection Panel Caution Before you touch the microphone connection panel, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Introduction With the DCN-FMIC Microphone Connection Panel, you can connect DCN-MICL and DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphones to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface Controls, connectors and indicators The microphone connection panel (refer to figure 22.1) contains: 1 Output level plug - Connect the microphone connection panel to a DCN-FCS Channel Selector to prevent acoustic feedback (refer to section ) 2 Microphone socket - Connects a DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone to the microphone connection panel (refer to chapter 17). 3 Solder spot - Enables or disables the green LED ring of the connected DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone (refer to section 22.3) Internal settings Use the solder spot to enable or disable the green LED ring of the connected DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone (refer also to section 17.4). table 22.1: Solder spot (* = default) Solder spot Description Not soldered* The green LED ring of the connected DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone is enabled. Soldered The green LED ring of the connected DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone is disabled. When the microphone connection panel is connected to a dual delegate interface that is in the dual delegate with one microphone mode, you must disable the green LED ring. If you do not disable the LED ring, the LED ring of the connected microphone cannot show the correct condition. For example, first delegate 1 enables the microphone (red) and then delegate 2 makes a request-to-speak (green). Although the microphone is enabled, the green LED ring comes on when delegate 2 pushes the microphone button Installation The microphone connection panel is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for the installation procedures table 22.2: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 40 x 50 mm (built-in depth about 50 mm) Weight: 10 g figure 22.1: Microphone connection panel

179 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en External connections Dual delegate interface A cable with a 6-pole CT plug and an 8-pole DIN plug is supplied with the panel. Use this cable to connect the panel to a DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface (refer to section 21.4 and section 21.6). Power consumption: 0.25 W DCN-FCS Headphones level reduction When you use a microphone connection panel with a DCN-FCS channel selector, connect the output level plug of the microphone connection panel to the level reduction plug of the channel selector (refer to figure 22.2 and figure 22.3). This prevents acoustic feedback. When the microphone that is connected to the microphone connection panel is enabled, the channel selector automatically decreases the volume level of the signal that is sent to the headphones of the channel selector. You can connect, for example, an AMP socket to the output level plug of the microphone connection panel. 2 1 figure 22.2: Output level plug, connection table 22.3: Output level plug, connection Pin Signal 1 Positive 2 GND 1 2 DCN-FMIC 1 2 DCN-FCS figure 22.3: Channel selector, connection

180 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panel Caution Before you touch the microphone control panel, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Introduction With the DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panel, delegates can enable or disable the audio input that is connected to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface Control, connectors and indicators The microphone control panel (refer to figure 23.1) contains: 1 Microphone button - Enables or disables the microphone. The microphone button has a LED ring that shows the condition of the microphone (refer to section 23.5) Installation The microphone control panel is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for the installation procedures. table 23.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 40 x 50 mm (built-in depth about 50 mm) Weight: 54 g 23.4 External connections A Cat-4 cable with RJ11 plugs is supplied with the microphone connection panel. Use this cable to connect the panel to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface or DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panel (refer to section 21.4 and section 21.6). table 23.2: Power consumption Power consumption: 0.25 W 23.5 Operation The color of the LED ring of the microphone button shows the condition of the microphone that is connected to the microphone control panel (refer to table 23.3). table 23.3: Condition Color Condition Red (on) Microphone enabled Red (flash) Last minute of speech time Green (on) Request-to-speak Green (flash) First in request-to-speak list Yellow (on) VIP mode figure 23.1: Microphone control panel You can only put the microphone control panel in the VIP mode with the Microphone Management software module. Refer to the applicable Software User Manuals for instructions that tell you how to enable the VIP mode.

181 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FPRIOB Priority Panel Caution Before you touch the priority panel, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Introduction With the DCN-FPRIOB Priority Panel, chairmen can disable the microphones of all delegate devices. The priority panel must be used with the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface in the chairman mode Controls, connectors and indicators The priority panel (refer to figure 24.1) contains: 1 Priority button - Disables the microphones of all delegate devices and enables the microphone of the chairman device when it is pushed. The priority control button has a LED ring that shows the condition of the microphone (refer to section 24.5) Installation The priority panel is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for the installation procedures. table 24.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 40 x 50 mm (built-in depth about 50 mm) Weight: 54 g 24.4 External connections A Cat-4 cable with RJ11 plugs is supplied with the priority panel. Use this cable to connect the panel to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface (refer to section 21.4 and section 21.6). table 24.2: Power consumption Power consumption: 0.25 W 24.5 Operation The red LED ring comes on when you push the priority button. The system has the possibility to: Play an attention chime when the chairman pushes the priority button (refer to section 8.8.3). Erase the request-to-speak list and the speakers list when the chairman pushes the priority button (refer to section 8.8.4). 1 figure 24.1: Priority panel

182 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FLSP Loudspeaker Panel Caution Before you touch the loudspeaker panel, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Introduction You can connect the DCN-FLSP Loudspeaker Panel to the audio outputs of the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface Controls, connectors and indicators The loudspeaker panel (refer to figure 25.1) contains: 1 Loudspeaker - Gives the audio signal from the floor to the delegate or chairman Installation The loudspeaker panel is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for the installation procedures. table 25.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 40 x 100 x 100 mm (built-in depth about 50 mm) Weight: 203 g 25.4 External connections A cable with a 3.5 mm plug is supplied with the loudspeaker panel (refer to figure 25.2). Use this cable to connect the panel to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface figure 25.2: 3.5 mm loudspeaker plug, connection table 25.2: 3.5 mm loudspeaker plug, connection Number Signal Not connected 3 - table 25.3: Power consumption Power consumption: 0.7 W figure 25.1: Loudspeaker panel

183 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panel Caution Before you touch the voting panel, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Introduction With the DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panel, delegates can make votes. The voting panel must be used with the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface. Refer to table 26.1 for an overview of the different types Controls, connectors and indicators Top The top of the voting panel (refer to figure 26.2 and figure 26.1) contains: 1 Condition LED - Shows the condition of the voting panel (refer to section 26.5). 2 Voting buttons - Operate the voting panel (refer to section 26.5). Each voting button has a yellow LED. The LED shows the condition of the voting button. 3 Card reader - Can give access to the voting panel. 1 table 26.1: Types Type DCN-FVCRD DCN-FV Description Voting panel with card reader Voting panel without card reader 2 figure 26.1: Top view (DCN-FV) figure 26.2: Top view (DCN-FVCRD)

184 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Bottom side The bottom side of the voting panel (refer to figure 26.3) contains: 4 External contact plug - Connects the voting panel to an external contact (refer to section ). 5 Solder spot - Configures the external contact plug (refer to section ). 6 RJ11 sockets - Connect the voting panel to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface and the DCN-FMICB Microphone Control Panel. The two RJ11 sockets are the same. There is not a special RJ11 socket for the dual delegate interface or the microphone control panel Installation The voting panel is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for the installation procedures. table 26.2: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x built-in depth): 40 x 100 x 80 mm (DCN-FVCRD) 40 x 100 x 50 mm (DCN-FV) Weight: 104 g (DCN-FVCRD) 81 g (DCN-FV) You can install the voting panel in a DCN-TTH Tabletop Housing (refer to chapter 31) External connections Dual delegate interface A Cat-4 cable with RJ11 plugs is supplied with the panel. Use this cable to connect the panel to the DCN-DDI Dual Delegate Interface (refer to section 21.4 and section 21.6). 5 table 26.3: Power consumption Power consumption: 0.15 W (DCN-FVCRD) 0.10 W (DCN-FV) 4 figure 26.3: Bottom view

185 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en External contact You can connect an external contact to the voting panel. The external contact must be connected to the external contact plug (refer to figure 26.4 and table 26.4). The external contact function is only available in systems that operate with a control PC that has one or more of these software modules: Parliamentary Voting software module Multi Voting software module Attendance Registration software module Refer to the applicable Software User Manuals for the instructions that tell you how to use the external contact. Use the solder spot (refer to section 26.2, no. 5) to configure the external contact plug. With the solder spot, you can configure the galvanic separation of pin 3 and the ground of the external contact plug (refer to table 26.5). table 26.5: Solder spot (* = default) Solder spot Description Not soldered* Pin 3 and the ground of the external contact plug are not internally connected. Soldered Pin 3 and the ground of the external plug are internally connected. Refer to figure 26.5 for a circuit diagram of an external contact connection that uses the galvanic separation. External On PCB +5V(DC) figure 26.4: External contact, connection + 2 R table 26.4: External contact, connection Pin Signal 1 +5 V(DC) (max. 20 ma) 2 Input, + 3 Input, V(DC) _ 3 X6 You can connect, for example, an AMP socket to the external contact plug of the voting panel. figure 26.5: External contact, connection (1)

186 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 186 Refer to figure 26.6 for a circuit diagram of an external contact connection that does not use the galvanic separation Operation The signs on the voting buttons show the parliamentary votes. The signs adjacent to the LEDs of the voting buttons show the multiple choice votes and the audience response votes. External On PCB 1 +5V(DC) In systems without control PC, it is only possible to make parliamentary votes. < 0.5 m 2 R The LEDs of the available voting buttons flash during a voting session. After the delegate has made a vote: The LED of the pushed voting button comes on. The LEDs of the other voting buttons go off. The condition LED shows the condition of the voting panel (refer to table 26.6). figure 26.6: External contact, connection (2) 3 X6 table 26.6: Conditions LED Off Blue (on) Blue, 5 Hz Yellow, 2 Hz Yellow, 5 Hz Yellow (on) Condition Device or system off System on No communication Card requested Card rejected Delegate present If an ID card has been requested (but cannot be used, because the unit does not have a card reader), the LED on the DCN-FV unit will continuously flash yellow.

187 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FCS Channel Selector Caution Before you touch the channel selector, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Top The top of the channel selector (refer to figure 27.2) contains: 6 DCN cable - Connects the channel selector to the DCN (refer to section ). 7 DCN socket - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the channel selector (refer to section ). 8 Level reduction plug - Reduces the level of the signal on the headphones when the microphone of a connected device is enabled (refer to section 27.7) Introduction With the DCN-FCS Channel Selector, delegates and chairmen can select a channel to listen to Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the channel selector (refer to figure 27.1) contains: 1 Headphones socket - Connects headphones to the channel selector (refer to section ). 2 Volume buttons - Control the volume level of the selected channel. 3 Display - Shows the number of the selected channel. 4 Channel buttons - Select the channel. 5 External headphones (plug) - Connects an external headphones socket to the channel selector (refer to section ). 7 figure 27.2: Top view 8 X figure 27.1: Front view

188 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Rear view The rear of the channel selector (refer to figure 27.3) contains: 9 External headphones (solder pads) - Connect an external headphones socket to the channel selector (refer to section ) Internal settings Introduction The component side of the PCB of the channel selector (refer to figure 27.4) contains solder spots. With these solder spots, you can configure the channel selector. 9 figure 27.3: Rear view X11 X12 X13 figure 27.4: Solder spots table 27.1: Solder spots Solder spot Function X11 Auto-standby function (refer to section ). X12 Volume increment/decrement function (refer to section ). X13 Channel/volume restore function (refer to section ).

189 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Auto standby function Use the X11 solder spot to enable or disable the auto standby function of the channel selector. table 27.2: Solder spot X11 (* = default) Solder spot Function Not soldered* The auto standby function is enabled. When the headphones are disconnected, the channel selector is disabled. Soldered The auto standby function is disabled. When the headphones are disconnected, the channel selector remains enabled. When you use the channel selector to record audio, you must close the X11 solder spot. The channel selector measures the impedance between pin 1 and pin 2 of the headphones plug (see section ). When this impedance is less than 1 kω, the channel selector identifies that the headphones are present Volume increment/decrement With the X12 solder spot, you can enable or disable the volume increment/decrement function of the channel selector. table 27.3: Solder spot X12 (* = default) Solder spot Function Not soldered* The volume increment/ decrement function is enabled. When the volume up (down) button is pushed for longer than 0.25 seconds, the volume level is increased (decreased) with 12 db per second. Soldered The volume increment/ decrement function is disabled. When the volume up (down) button is pushed, the volume level increases (decreases) with one step of 1 db.

190 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Channel/volume restore function Use the X13 solder spot to enable or disable the channel/volume restore function of the channel selector. table 27.4: Solder spot X11 (* = default) Solder spot Function Not soldered* The channel/volume restore function is disabled. When the channel selector is enabled, it automatically: Selects channel 0 (floor) Sets the volume level to -18 db. Soldered The channel/volume restore function is enabled. When the channel selector is enabled, it automatically: Select the last known channel. Sets the last know volume level. For example, you can enable this function when all delegates and chairmen have a fixed seat number. The channel selector saves all channel changes after 5 seconds Installation The channel selector is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for installation procedures. table 27.5: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 40 x 100 mm (built-in depth about 80 mm) Weight: approximately 300 g You can install the channel selector in a DCN-TTH Tabletop Housing (refer to chapter 31) External connections DCN Connect the channel selector to the DCN with the DCN cable. You can use the DCN socket to make a loop-through with the channel selector. table 27.6: DCN connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Power consumption: 0.9 W If the last known channel number is greater than the maximum number of channels that are available, the channel selector automatically goes to channel 0. When the last known channel becomes available, it is only restored if you did not operate the buttons of the channel selector.

191 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones socket of the channel selector. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 27.5) External headphones socket You can connect an external headphones socket to the channel selector (e.g. a 6.3 mm headphones socket). The external headphones socket must be connected to a plug (refer to figure 27.6) or to solder pads (refer to figure 27.7). figure 27.5: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection table 27.7: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right X18 X17 X16 You can also connect mono headphones to the channel selector. figure 27.6: External headphones, connection (1) figure 27.7: External headphones, connection (2)

192 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 192 The solder pads and the plug are internally connected (refer to table 27.8). table 27.8: External headphones, connection Plug (pin) Solder pad Signal 1 X18 Left 2 X16 Right 3 X17 Common You can connect, for example, an AMP socket to the external headphones plug of the channel selector Level reduction plug When the channel selector is used with a device that has a microphone, acoustic feedback can occur.use the level reduction plug (refer to figure 27.8) to prevent acoustic feedback. Connect a voltage to the level reduction plug to decrease the volume level of the signal on the headphones (refer to table 27.10). table 27.10: Output level reduction Voltage Description < 1 V(DC) The output level of the channel selector is not decreased. > 3 V(DC) The output level of the channel selector is decreased. These devices have a output level plug that you can connect to the level reduction plug of the channel selector: DCN-CON Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONCS Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONFF Concentus Delegate Unit DCN-CONCM Concentus Chairman Unit DCN-FMIC Microphone Connection Panel 1 2 figure 27.8: Output level plug, connection table 27.9: Output level plug, connection Pin Signal 1 Positive 2 GND You can connect, for example, an AMP socket to the level reduction plug of the channel selector.

193 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FVU Voting Unit Caution Before you touch the voting unit, take measures to prevent electro-static discharges Introduction With the DCN-FVU Voting Unit, delegates can make votes. Refer to table 28.1 for an overview of the different types. table 28.1: Types Type DCN-FVU DCN-FVU-CN Description Standard version Chinese version 28.2 Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the voting unit (refer to figure 28.1 and figure 28.2) contains: 1 Condition LED - Shows the condition of the voting unit (refer to section 28.5). 2 Voting buttons - Operate the voting panel (refer to section 28.5). Each button has a LED that shows the condition of the button. 1 2 figure 28.1: Front view (DCN-FVU) 1 2 figure 28.2: Front view (DCN-FVU-CN)

194 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Top The top of the voting unit (refer to figure 28.3) contains: 3 De-init switch - Erases the address of the voting unit. All LEDs on the voting unit come on when the voting unit has no address (refer to section 8.7). 4 DCN cable - Connects the voting unit to the DCN (refer to section ). 5 DCN socket - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the voting unit (refer to section ) Bottom The bottom of the voting unit (refer to figure 28.4) contains: 6 External contact plug - Connects the voting unit to an external contact (refer to section ). 7 Solder spot - Configures the external contact plug (refer to section ) figure 28.4: Bottom (all types) figure 28.3: Top (all types) 28.3 Installation The voting unit is a flush-mounted device. Refer to chapter 19 for the installation procedures. table 28.2: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 40 x 100 mm (built-in depth about 80 mm) Weight: 250 g You can install the voting unit in a DCN-TTH Tabletop Housing (refer to chapter 31).

195 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en External connections DCN Use the DCN cable with the DCN plug to connect the voting unit to the DCN. You can use the cable with the DCN socket to make a loop-through with the voting unit External contact Refer to section for information about the external contact of the voting unit. The external contacts of the voting panel and the voting unit are the same When you do not make a loop-through with the voting unit, connect an LBB4118/00 Cable Termination Plug to the DCN cable with the DCN socket. If you do not connect a cable termination plug, the system can operate incorrectly. table 28.3: DCN connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Power consumption: 1.0 W figure 28.5: External contact, connection table 28.4: External contact, connection Pin Signal 1 +5 V(DC) (max. 20 ma) 2 Input, + 3 Input, - You can connect, for example, an AMP socket to the external contact plug of the voting panel. Use the solder spot (refer to figure 28.4, no. 7) to configure the external contact plug. With the solder spot, you can configure the galvanic separation of pin 3 and the ground of the external contact plug (refer to table 28.5). table 28.5: Solder spot (* = default) Solder spot Description Not soldered* Pin 3 and the ground of the external contact plug are not internally connected. Soldered Pin 3 and the ground of the external plug are internally connected.

196 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 196 Refer to figure 28.6 for a circuit diagram of an external contact connection that uses the galvanic separation. Refer to figure 28.7 for a circuit diagram of an external contact connection that does not use the galvanic separation. External 1 On PCB +5V(DC) External 1 On PCB +5V(DC) 4-12 V(DC) + _ 2 R < 0.5 m 2 R 3 X7 3 X7 figure 28.6: External contact, connection (1) figure 28.7: External contact, connection (2)

197 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en Operation Refer to section 26.5 for information about the operation of the voting panel. The operation of the voting unit and the voting panel are the same, but the condition LED of the voting panel shows less conditions (refer to table 28.6). table 28.6: Conditions LED Off Blue (on) Blue, 5 Hz Yellow (on) Condition Device or system off Device on No communication Delegate present The chinese version of the voting panel can only be used for parliamentary voting sessions and for/against voting sessions, because the chinese version has 4 voting buttons. All other voting sessions use a minimum of 5 voting buttons.

198 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FCOUP Couple You can use the DCN-FCOUP Couple to install flush-mounted devices (refer to chapter 19). figure 29.1: End cap

199 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FEC End Caps You can use the DCN-FEC End Caps to install flush-mounted devices (refer to chapter 19). figure 30.1: End cap

200 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-TTH Tabletop Housing You can use the DCN-TTH Tabletop Housing to install these flush-mounted devices: DCN-FCS Channel Selector DCN-FV(CRD) Voting Panel DCN-FVU Voting Unit Use the click-to-fit mechanism (refer to figure 19.1) of the flush-mounted devices to install the flush-mounted devices in the tabletop housing. You can attach the tabletop housing to a flat surface with M3 screws (refer to figure 31.2) (97.5) 6(4x) (113) figure 31.1: Tabletop housing figure 31.2: Bottom view table 31.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 80 x 120 x 105 mm Weight: 243 g You can temporarily close the tabletop housing with a DCN-FBP (Flush Blank Panel).

201 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en DCN-FBP panels You can use the DCN-FBP (Flush Bank Panel) or the DCN-FBPS (Flush Bank Panel Short) to temporarily close recesses (refer to figure 32.1 and table 32.1). figure 32.1: Flush blank panel table 32.1: Physical characteristics Panel type Dimensions (w x d) DCN-FBP 40 x 100 mm DCN-FBPS 40 x 50 mm

202 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Flush-mounted Devices en 202 Intentionally left blank

203 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en 203 Section 5 - Interpretation Devices

204 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en DCN-IDESK Interpreter Desks 33.1 Introduction With the DCN-IDESK Interpreter Desks, the interpreters can add interpretations to the discussion or the conference Controls, connectors and indicators Top The top of the desk (refer to figure 33.1) contains: 1 Beeps button - Enables or disables the beeps (refer to section ). This function is for blind interpreters. 2 Primary knob - Operates the display to configure and operate the interpreter desk. 3 Display - Shows the configuration and user menus. 4 Pre-select buttons - Give the interpreters access to a channel from which they can make interpretation. 5 Output buttons - Set the output channel to send the target language. 6 Microphone socket - Connects a DCN-MICL or DCN-MICS Pluggable Microphone to the interpreter desk (refer to chapter 17). 7 Telephone LED - Comes on when the interpreter desk receives a phone call from an external telephone system (refer to section ). 8 Intercom LED - Comes on when the interpreter desk receives an intercom call. 9 Message button - Opens text messages that are sent to the interpreter desk. When the interpreter desk receives a message, the yellow LED adjacent to the message button blinks. 10 Intercom button (operator) - Opens an intercom channel to the operator. 11 Headphones treble knob - Adjusts the level of the treble of the signal that is sent to the headphones. 12 Headphones bass knob - Adjust the level of the bass of the signal that is sent to the headphones. 13 Headphones volume knob - Adjust the volume level of the signal that is sent to the headphones. 14 Loudspeaker volume knob - Adjusts the volume level of the signal that is sent to the loudspeaker of the interpreter desk. 15 Loudspeaker - The loudspeaker is on only when the microphones of all the interpreter desks in the same interpreter booth are off. 16 Floor/Auto-relay button - Sets the source of the interpretation (refer to also section 33.5). 17 Microphone button - Enables or disables the microphone. The microphone button has a red LED that comes on when the microphone is enabled. 18 Mute button - Temporarily disables the microphone. 19 Help button - For help signaling. The interpreter can only use the help button when the system contains an DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board (refer to section ). 20 Speak slowly button - For speak slowly signaling. The interpreter can only use the speak slowly button when the system contains an DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board (refer to section ). 21 Intercom button (chairman) - Opens an intercom channel to the chairman Left side The left side of the interpreter desk (refer to figure 33.2) contains: 22 Headphones socket (6.3 mm) - Connects headphones with a 6.3 mm plug to the interpreter desk (refer to section ). 23 Headset socket - Connects a headset to the interpreter desk (refer to section ). 24 Headphones socket (3.5 mm) - Connects headphones with a 3.5 mm plug to the interpreter desk (refer to section ).

205 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Phone Intercom a b c d e A B Call Engaged Chair Slow Floor Auto-relay Micro Mute Help figure 33.1: Top view The interpreter desks has pimples which blind interpreters can use to locate the Micro, Mute and c buttons (refer to figure 33.1). figure 33.2: Left view

206 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Bottom side The bottom side of the desk (refer to figure 33.3 and figure 33.4) contains: 25 DCN cable - Connects the interpreter desk to the DCN (refer to section ). 26 External devices socket - Connects a booth-on-air indicator or device that operates the telephone and intercom LEDs on the interpreter desk (refer to section ). 27 DCN socket - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the interpreter desk (refer to section ) Screw holes - Attach the interpreter desk to a flat surface (refer to section 33.3). The distance between the centers of the screw holes is 100 mm. 29 De-init switch - Erases the address of the interpreter desk (refer to section 8.7). All LEDs on the interpreter desk come on when the interpreter desk does not have an address. 30 Sensitivity potentiometer - Adjusts the volume level of the microphone that is connected to the interpreter desk. 31 Cable lock - Fixes the DCN cable. figure 33.3: Bottom view (1) figure 33.4: Bottom view (2) 30 31

207 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Installation Install the interpreter desk on a flat surface or in a recess (refer to figure 33.5). When you install the interpreter desk in a flat surface, use the template (refer to figure 33.6). When you install the interpreter desk in a recess, make sure that the interpreter can connect the headphones or the headset. 1.5 mm table 33.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 80 x 330 x 160 mm Weight: 1.3 kg When you attach the interpreter desk to a flat surface, put screws with a length of 10 mm in the screw holes (refer to figure 33.4, no. 28). The distance between the centres of the screw holes is 100 mm. figure 33.5: Installation R49+0.2(4x) R (2x) figure 33.6: Template (refer to the CD-ROM that is supplied with the system for a *.dwg file)

208 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en External connections DCN Connect the interpreter desk to the DCN with the DCN cable. You can use the DCN socket to make a loop-through with the interpreter desk Headset You can connect a headset to the headset socket of the interpreter desk. The headset socket (refer to figure 33.2) must be IEC compliant with a 5-pole 180 DIN plug. table 33.2: DCN connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Location: Bottom side Power consumption: 3.6 W figure 33.7: Headset socket, connection table 33.3: Headset socket, connection Pin Signal 1 Microphone supply 2 Microphone in 3 Headphones out, left 4 Headphones common 5 Headphones out, right table 33.4: Headset socket Number of connections: 1x IEC pole 180 DIN socket Location: Left side Nominal microphone input level: 7 mvrms Maximum microphone input level: 25 db with respect to nominal input level Overload microphone input level: > 124 mvrms

209 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Headphones You can connect headphones to the headphones sockets of the interpreter desk. The headphones must have a 3.5 mm plug (refer to figure 33.8) or a 6.3 mm plug (refer to figure 33.9) External devices You can use the external devices socket to connect: A booth-on-air indicator to the interpreter desk. An external intercom system to the intercom LED of the interpreter desk. An external telephone system to the telephone LED of the interpreter desk. 1 8 figure 33.8: 3.5 mm headphones plug, connection figure 33.9: 6.3 mm headphones plug, connection table 33.5: Headphones plug, connection Number Signal 1 Left 2 Common 3 Right You can also connect mono headphones to the interpreter desk. table 33.6: Headphones sockets, details Number of connections: 1x 3.5 mm socket 1x 6.3 mm socket Location: Left side figure 33.10: External devices socket, connection table 33.7: External devices socket, connection Pin Function Signal Booth-on-air Switch pin 1 3 Booth-on-air Switch pin Telephone Positive in 6 Telephone Negative in 7 Intercom Positive in 8 Intercom Negative in table 33.8: External devices socket, details Number of connections: 1x RJ45 socket Location: Bottom side Contact rating (booth-on-air contact): 24 V/1 A potential free contact Signal levels: no call: < 1 V(DC) call: > 3 V(DC), max. 24 V(DC)

210 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Operation Introduction When you start the central control unit, the interpreter desk starts. The display on the desk shows the hardware and software versions. For example: The operational mode starts automatically if the desk has the correct configuration. The operational mode is the default mode for the interpreter desk. If the desk is not configured, the display shows the screen: You cannot put a desk that is not configured in the operational mode Auto-relay interpretation Where the interpreter does not know the source floor language, the system has an automatic relay function (refer to figure 33.12). One interpreter makes an interpretation from the source language (floor signal) in a language that the other interpreters know. This language is the auto-relay interpretation. The auto-relay interpretation automatically replaces the floor signal on all interpreter desks. All interpreters use the auto-relay interpretation to make interpretations. The example in figure shows that the floor signal is Chinese. The auto-relay is enabled at the Chinese interpreter desk. The Chinese-to-English interpreter selects output B and sends an English auto-relay interpretation to all other interpreter desks. The LED adjacent to the Floor/Auto-relay button shows on all other interpreter desks that the interpreter desk receive an auto-relay interpretation Normal interpretation In the usual procedure for interpreters (refer to figure 33.11), the interpreter knows the source floor language. The interpreter makes an interpretation of the source language in the target language. The language distribution channels transmit the target language to the delegate units. ENG Floor CHI B A A A ENG CHI FRE GER ENG figure 33.12: Auto-relay interpretation Floor ENG A A A A In the installation mode of the interpreter desk, output B can be assigned with an auto-relay function. CHI FRE GER ENG figure 33.11: Normal interpretation from floor

211 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Beeps The interpreter desk can generate beeps for notification of special events to support blind interpreters (refer to table 33.9 and figure 33.13) on the headphones. The volume level of the beeps depends on the position of the volume control of the headphones. The audio beeps can be toggled on and off with the beeps button (refer to figure 33.1). When beeps are enabled, a musical note appears in the display. table 33.9: Beeps Tone Beep on Beep off Microphone on Microphone off Quality indication External phonecall Intercom Event Beeps are enabled. Beeps are disabled. Microphone is switched on. Microphone is switched off. Own channel is selected while the microphone is on OR the quality of the selected channel is -. Incoming phone call (only when beeps are enabled and microphone is off). Intercom call (only when beeps are enabled and microphone is off). Except for beep on and beep off, all beeps are only available when beeps have been enabled.

212 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en 212 f(hz) Beep on - Microphone on t(ms) f(hz) Beep off - Microphone off t(ms) f(hz) Quality indication f(hz) t(ms) Intercom t(ms) f(hz) Ext. phonecall t(ms) figure 33.13: Beeps

213 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Configuration Introduction Before the start of a discussion or a conference, the interpreter and system parameters of the interpreter desk can be put manually in the installation mode of the desk Overview The installation mode of the desk consists of a number of menus in which options have to be chosen. Some menus are applicable only to the desk that is being configured, whereas other menus apply to all interpreter desks in the system. table 33.10: Installation mode menus Menu Description Scope a User language System b Interpreter booth number Desk c Desk number Desk d Number of channels System e Language list System f Language channels System g Outgoing channel A Desk h Outgoing channel B Desk j Number of auto-relay booths System k Auto-relay booths System l Microphone locks System m Speak slowly signaling System n Help signaling System o Speech timer Desk p Microphone source Desk A description of the Simultaneous Interpretation software manual is beyond the scope of this manual. Refer for detailed information about this software to its own manual Start the installation mode 1 Make sure the interpreter desk has an address (refer to section 8.7). 2 Push the b preselect channel button and the B output selection button at the same time. The installation mode of the interpreter desk starts. 3 The display shows: Some installation mode screens affect all interpreter desks in the system, only one interpreter desk at a time can be in the installation mode. 4 When one of the interpreter desks in the system already is in the installation mode, the display shows: In PC based systems only menus a, b, c, o and p have to be configured manually on each desk. All other menus can be configured from the PC. PC based systems using the Simultaneous Interpretation software module have extended control and preset facilities as compared to a stand-alone interpretation system.

214 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Navigation in the installation mode In the installation mode, only a small number of controls are available (refer to table and figure 33.1) Menu screens Menu a Menu a sets the display language of the interpreter desk when in the installation mode. The language is set for all interpreter desks in the system. table 33.11: Controls in the installation mode Control Function Primary knob Select menu option(s) Preselect channel Go to the previous menu button a Preselect channel Go to the next menu button b Preselect channel Clear current selection button d Preselect channel Enter current selection button e Output selection Exit the installation mode button B Configuration procedures To select the necessary parameters in the installation menus to configure the interpreter desk do as follows: 1 Push the a and b preselect channel buttons to go to the necessary installation menu. The parameter that is set has square brackets, for example, [option]. 2 Push the d preselect channel button to clear the set parameter. The square brackets change to arrow brackets, for example, <option>. This shows that you can select a different choice with the primary knob. 3 Turn the primary knob to go to the necessary parameter. When the correct parameter is selected, push the e preselect channel button. The arrow brackets change to square brackets Menu b Menu b sets the interpreter desk to an interpreter booth. It is necessary to set each interpreter desk in turn. If an interpreter booth is full, no entry is possible and no response is given Menu c Menu c sets a desk number to the unit in the interpreter booth. It is necessary to set each interpreter desk in turn. If a desk number is already in use, no entry is possible and no response is given.

215 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Menu d Menu d sets the number of necessary language channels in the system. The number is set for all interpreter desks in the system. The default number of channels in a system that does not have a control PC is 26 (refer to table 33.12). table 33.12: Channels Language Contribution Intercom Delegate Menu e Menu e sets the list of languages (refer to appendix B) that are used to display on the interpreter desk display. The language list is set for all interpreter desks in the system Menu f Menu f sets a language to a specified channel. The number of channels to which a language can be set is the same as the number of channels set in menu d. The language list is set for all interpreter desks in the system. If a language is set to a channel, an asterisk appears in the display. For example:

216 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Menu g Menu g sets a channel number to output A. The channel number must be available on the interpreter desk. It is necessary to set each interpreter desk in turn Menu l Menu l sets the necessary interlock mode. The interlock mode is set for all interpreter desks in the system. When you install the interpreter desk for the first time, the interpreter booth number is the default channel number for output A Menu h Menu h sets a channel to output B of the interpreter desk. It is necessary to set each interpreter desk in turn. Output B can be set either for none or all available channels. table 33.13: Microphone lock options Option Description None No lock functionality. Audio inputs of the audio expander are disabled for translation channels only. Override Allows an interpreter to override another interpreter in another interpreter booth supplying the same interpretation channel. Interlock Blocks another interpreter from using the same channel in another interpreter booth Menu j Menu j sets the number of auto-relay interpreter booths in the system. The number is set for all interpreter desks in the system Menu k Menu k sets the interpreter booths that are auto-relay booths. The interpreter booths are set for all interpreter desks in the system. When the interlock mode is None and interpreter desks using the same outgoing channel are connected to different CCUs, the interpreter desks work as if the interlock mode is set to Interlock Menu m Menu m sets the speak slowly signal on and off. Speak slowly signaling must have the DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board (refer to chapter 47).

217 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en Menu n Menu n sets the help signaling on and off. Help signaling must have the DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board (refer to chapter 47) Menu o Menu o sets the speech timer of the interpreter desk on and off. It is necessary to set each interpreter desk in turn Menu p Menu p sets the source for the microphone source. It is necessary to set each interpreter desk in turn Operation The colors of the LED around the microphone button shows the condition of the microphone that is connected to the interpreter desk (refer to table 33.14). table 33.14: Condition Color Condition Red (on) Microphone enabled Red (flash) Engaged warning Green (on) Interpreter booth off Refer to the Quick Reference Card of the interpreter desk for instructions that tell you how to operate the interpreter desk Exit screen From the exit screen menu you can exit the installation mode.

218 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Interpretation Devices en 218 Intentionally left blank.

219 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en 219 Section 6 - Installation Devices

220 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en DCN-EPS Extension Power Supply 34.1 Introduction The DCN-EPS Extension Power Supply supplies power to the DCN. You can use it to increase the number of devices that can be connected to the system. The Power Supply has a power consumption of 0.8 W. The DCN-EPS-UL Extension Power Supply is the CSA/UL approved version of the DCN-EPS Rear view The rear of the extension power supply (refer to figure 34.2) contains: 2 DCN cable - Connects the extension power supply to the trunk of the DCN (refer to section ). 3 DCN socket (trunk) - Makes a loop-through in the trunk of the DCN (refer to section ). 4 DCN sockets (tap-off) - Make tap-offs in the DCN (refer to section ). The socket regenerates the DCN signal. 5 Power inlet - Connects the extension power supply to the mains power supply with a power cable (refer to section ). 6 Fuse holder - Prevents damage to the internal power supply unit of the extension power supply (refer to section ) Controls, connectors and indicators Front view The front of the extension power supply (refer to figure 35.1) contains: 1 On/Off LED - A green LED that comes on when: The power cable is connected to the mains power supply The trunk cable is connected to the system The central control unit is started Trunk Tap-off In Out Out figure 34.2: Rear view Out 6 1 figure 34.1: Front view

221 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Internal settings Use the connector block inside the extension power supply to select the voltage on which the extension power supply must operate (refer to figure 34.3 and table 34.1) figure 34.3: Internal settings table 34.1: Internal settings (n.c. = not connected) Fuse T5A Fuse T4A H Pin 105 V(AC) 115 V(AC) 125 V(AC) 220 V(AC) 230 V(AC) 240 V(AC) 1 Blue (power) n.c. Blue (power) Blue (power) n.c. Blue (power) 2 Black Green Green Green Green Green 3 Green Blue Black Green Black Black (power) 4 Orange Orange Orange n.c. Blue n.c. 5 Blue (transformer) Blue (transformer) Blue (transformer) Blue (transformer) Blue (transformer) Blue (transformer) 6 n.c. Black n.c. Violet Violet Violet 7 Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow 8 n.c. n.c. n.c. Orange Orange Orange 9 Violet Violet Violet n.c. n.c. n.c. 10 Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown

222 Trunk In Out Tap-off Out Out DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Installation Install the extension power supply in a 19-inch rack system or on a flat surface. Two brackets are supplied with the extension power supply (refer to figure 34.4). You can only install the extension power supply in a 19-inch rack system together with a second extension power supply External connections Power supply To connect the extension power supply to a power supply do as follows: 1 Connect the internal connector block to select the correct voltage that the extension power supply must operate (refer to section 34.3). The DCN-EPS is configured for a voltage of V(AC). The DCN-EPS-UL is configured for a voltage of V(AC). figure 34.4: Installation table 34.2: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 100 x 200 x 308 mm (without brackets) Depth with brackets: 348 mm Weight: 8.3 kg Caution Before you open the extension power supply, you must disconnect it from the mains power supply. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you. 2 Make sure that the fuse holder on the rear of the extension power supply contains the correct fuse (refer to table 34.1). 3 Connect a locally approved power cable to the extension power supply (refer to figure 34.5). figure 34.5: Power supply

223 Trunk In Trunk In Out Tap-off DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Connect the power cable to a locally approved mains power supply DCN tap-offs With the DCN tap-off sockets, you can make tap-offs in the DCN (refer to figure 34.7). Caution Make sure that the mains power supply is connect to a ground. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you DCN Connect the extension power supply to the system with the DCN cable (refer to figure 34.6). You can use the DCN trunk socket to make a loop-through with the extension power supply. Out Tap-off Out Out Out Out Tap-off Out Out figure 34.7: DCN tap-offs In Out figure 34.6: DCN trunk Tap-off Out Each DCN tap-off socket has a red LED that comes on if there is an overload (refer to section 1.6.4). table 34.4: DCN tap-off connections Number of connections: 2x DCN socket Location: Rear side Power supply: max. 2x 85 W The DCN trunk socket has a red LED that comes on if there is an overload (refer to section 1.6.4). table 34.3: DCN trunk connections Number of connections: 1x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Location: Rear side Power supply: max. 1x 85 W

224 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter 35.3 Installation You can install the trunk splitter on a flat surface (refer to figure 35.2). Use the lid of the trunk splitter to fix the the DCN cables Introduction Use the LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter to divide the DCN trunk Controls, connectors and indicators The trunk splitter (refer to figure 35.1) contains: 1 DCN socket (tap-off 1) - Makes a tap-off in the DCN (refer to section 35.4). The socket regenerates the DCN signal. 2 DCN socket (tap-off 2) - Makes a tap-off in the DCN (refer to section 35.4). The socket regenerates the DCN signal. 3 DCN cable - Connects the trunk splitter in the trunk of the DCN (refer to section 35.4). 4 DCN socket (trunk) - Makes a loop-through in the DCN with the trunk splitter (refer to section 35.4). The socket does not regenerate the DCN signal. 1 2 figure 35.2: Installation table 35.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 35 x 49 x 140 mm Weight: approximately 300 g 35.4 External connections Connect the trunk splitter to the DCN with the DCN cable. You can use the DCN trunk socket to make a loop-through with the trunk splitter. With the DCN tap-off sockets, you can make tap-offs in the DCN.. 1 tap-off tap-off figure 35.1: Top and side views 4 trunk 3 figure 35.3: DCN table 35.2: DCN connection Number of connections: 3x DCN socket 1x DCN cable (2 m) with plug Location: Front and rear sides Power consumption: 1.3 W (LBB4114/00) 1.4 W (LBB4115/00)

225 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter 36.1 Introduction Use the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter to make tap-offs in the DCN that have protection against short-circuits. Typically, you will use LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitters to connect DCN-IDESK Interpreter Desks to the system Controls, connectors and indicators The differences between the LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter (refer to chapter 35) and the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter are that the DCN tap-off sockets of the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter: Each output has a maximum load of 4.5 W Give the trunk and the other tap-off protection against short-circuits Installation Refer to section 35.3 for information about the installation of the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter. The procedures to install the LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter and the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter are the same External connections Refer to section 35.4 for information about the external connections of the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter. The external connections of the LBB4114/00 Trunk Splitter and the LBB4115/00 Protected Trunk Splitter are the same.

226 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4116 Extension Cables 37.2 Connectors Refer to figure 37.1 and figure 37.2 for details Introduction These extension cable (assembly) products are available: Socket Plug table 37.1: Extension cables Type number Cable length LBB4116/02 2 m LBB4116/05 5 m LBB4116/10 10 m LBB4116/15 15 m LBB4116/20 20 m LBB4116/25 25 m LBB4116/ m Except for LBB4116/00, all extension cables have DCN plugs and sockets. figure 37.1: DCN plug and socket Plug Socket figure 37.2: DCN plug and socket, connection GND figure 37.3: DCN cable, connection table 37.2: DCN cable, connection Pin Signal Color 1 Downlink GND Downlink data Green V(DC) Brown 4 Uplink data White 5 Uplink GND V(DC) Blue 37.3 Custom-made cables You can make custom-made cables with the LBB4116/00 Extension Cable (100 m) and the LBB4119/00 DCN Connectors (refer to chapter 38).

227 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4119/00 DCN Connectors Use the LBB4119/00 DCN Connectors to make cables from LBB4116/00 Extension Cable (100 m). Plug Socket figure 38.1: DCN connectors

228 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4117/00 Cable Locking Clamps You can use the LBB4117/00 Cable Locking Clamps to lock the connectors of extension cables. Each pair uses one clamp. figure 39.1: Cable locking clamp You cannot use the LBB4417/00 Cable Locking Clamps with the LBB4419/00 DCN Connectors.

229 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4118/00 Cable Termination Plug You must use an LBB4118/00 Cable Termination Plug to close an open-ended DCN cable (e.g. for voting units with two cables, or a spare or expansion cable). figure 40.1: Cable termination plug

230 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4410/00 Network Splitter 41.1 Introduction Use the LBB4410/00 Network Splitter to make tap-offs in the optical network that have protection against short-circuits Controls, connectors and indicators The exterior of the network splitter (refer to figure 41.1) contains: 1 External power supply socket - Connects the network splitter to an external power supply (refer to section ). The external power supply supplies power to the tap-offs. It does not supply power to the trunk. 2 Optical network socket (tap-off 1) - Makes a tap-off in the optical network (refer to section ). The socket has a maximum load of 2.5 A that gives protection against short-circuits. 3 Optical network socket (trunk) - Connects the network splitter to the trunk of the optical network (section ). 4 Lid - Gives access to the controls inside (refer to section 41.3). The rear side of the lid contains a label with an explanation about the internal settings (refer to figure 41.2). 5 Status LED - A yellow LED that gives information about the condition of the network splitter (refer to section 41.6). 6 Status LED - A green LED that gives information about the condition of the network splitter (refer to section 41.6). 7 Optical network socket (tap-off 2) - Makes a tap-off in the optical network (refer to section ). The socket has a maximum load of 2.5 A that gives protection against short-circuits. 8 Optical network socket (trunk) - Connects the network splitter to the trunk of the optical network (refer to section ) figure 41.1: Front, rear and top views

231 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Internal settings The rear of the cover of the network splitter shows a label that gives data of the internal connections (refer to figure 41.2). You can change the internal connections with the jumper blocks inside the network splitter. Main network Main network Tap off 1 External power (*1) Tap-off powered from: Current limit Tap-off 1 Current limit Tap-off 2 External power LED Main network External power 0.8 A 1.6 A 2.5 A 0.8 A 1.6 A 2.5 A On follows Main network Fault Power Tap off 2 figure 41.2: Label inside network splitter To supply additional power to the tap-offs that are connected to the network splitter: 1 Put jumper shunt 1/2 on position 1. 2 Put jumper shunt 9/10 on position Connect an external power supply to the network splitter (refer to section ).

232 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Installation You can attach the network splitter to a flat surface with a bracket (refer to figure 41.3). The distance (d) between the holes in the bracket is 40 mm External connections Optical network Connect the network splitter to the optical network with the optical network sockets (refer to figure 41.4). tap-off 1 trunk tap-off 2 trunk figure 41.4: Optical network d figure 41.3: Installation Push the sides of the unit to attach or remove the unit from the bracket. table 41.1: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w x d): 200 x 82.5 x 28.9 mm Weight: approximately 300 g If the distance between two devices is less than 100 m, use a network splitter between devices to remove the use of fiber interfaces. Use only the trunk sockets of the network splitter in this case. table 41.2: Optical network connections Number of connections: 4x optical network socket Location: Front and rear sides Power consumption: 3.9 W

233 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Power supply You can connect an external power supply to the external power supply socket of the network splitter. The network splitter is supplied with a Kycon KPP-4P plug (refer to figure 41.5), which you can connect to this socket. The external power supply only supplies power to the connected tap-offs. figure 41.5: Kycon KPP-4P plug, connection table 41.3: Kycon KPP-4P plug, connection Pin Signal 1 Ground 2 Power from the external power supply. Voltage: V, max. 5 A. 3 Power from the system. Voltage: 48 V, max. 5 A. 4 Not connected You can, for example, connect a DCN-EPS Extension Power Supply to the Kycon KPP-4P socket of the network splitter. The Kycon KPP-4P plug is shown in parts (refer to figure 41.6). semi-circular notch F I H figure 41.6: Kycon KPP-4P plug, parts G table 41.4: Kycon KPP-4P plug, parts Part Description A Customer cable B Strain relief C Plastic enclosure D Metal spring E Plastic guide F Top metal cover G Pin mold H Lower metal sleeve I Plastic coupling E slot 'U' section slotted cut-out metal tabs You must assemble the connector before you use it. 1 Attach the Strain Relief (B) to the Plastic Enclosure (C). 2 Pull the Cable (A) through the Strain Relief (B)/Plastic Enclosure (C) assembly, Metal Spring (D) and Plastic Guide Ring (E). 3 Attach the ends of the cable wires to the solder cups on Pin Mold (G) (refer to figure 41.5 and table 41.3). 4 Correctly align the Pin Mold (G) with the Lower Metal Sleeve (H). The slotted sections on the sides of the Pin Mold (G) must align with the slotted cut-outs on the Lower Metal Sleeve (H). The 3 semi-circular notches around the perimeter of the Pin Mold (G) must line up with the 3 metal tabs inside the Lower Metal Sleeve (H). arm D C B A

234 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Push the Pin Mold (G) into the Lower Metal Sleeve (H) until they lock. 6 Push the three metal tabs on the Lower Metal Sleeve (H) into the notches in the Pin Mold (G). 7 Crimp the 'U' section of the Lower Metal Sleeve (H) onto the Cable (A). 8 Attach the Plastic Ring Guide (E) to the Lower Metal Sleeve (H) and engage the plastic arms into the correct slots in the sides of the sleeve. 9 Attach the Top Metal Cover (F) to Lower Metal Sleeve (H). Be sure to align all tabs. Make sure that the cover is attached correctly. 10 Push the Metal Spring (D) to the Top Metal Cover (F)/Lower Metal Sleeve (H) assembly. This helps to hold the assembly together. 11 Push the Strain Relief (B)/Plastic Enclosure (C) assembly to the Top Metal Cover (F)/Lower Metal Sleeve (H) assembly. Align the two assemblies as shown in the drawing. Make sure that the Metal Spring (D) stays in place and does not bend during assembly. A large force can be necessary to attach the two assemblies together. 12 Make sure that the Strain Relief (B)/Plastic Enclosure (C) assembly is locked to the Top Metal Cover (F)/Lower Metal Sleeve (H) assembly. The two assemblies should not be able to be pulled apart. 13 Align the new assembly with the Plastic Coupling (I) shown in the drawing. Push assembly into Plastic Coupling (I) until it locks to the Plastic Coupling. The connector assembly is complete Operation The two LEDs on the network splitter give information about the condition of the network splitter. table 41.5: Status LEDs Green (Power) Yellow (Fault) Condition Off Off The network splitter does not receive any power. Off On There is no optical network available or there is a fault in the optical network. On Off The network splitter functions correctly.

235 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4414/10 Fiber Interface Introduction Use the LBB4414/10 Fiber Interface to connect a Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) to a Glass Optical Fiber (GOF). A GOF network can transmit a signal to a larger distance than a POF network Controls, connectors and indicators The fiber interface (refer to figure 42.1) contains: 1 External power supply socket - Connects the fiber interface to an external power supply (refer to section ). 2 Optical network socket (POF) - Connects the fiber interface to a POF (refer to section ). 3 Status LED - A yellow LED that gives information about the condition of the fiber interface (refer to section 42.5). 4 Status LED - A green LED that gives information about the condition of the fiber interface (refer to section 42.5). 5 GOF socket - Connects the fiber interface to a GOF (refer to section ) figure 42.1: Exterior of the fiber interface

236 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Installation Refer to section 41.4 for information about the installation of the fiber interface. The procedures to install the network splitter and the fiber interface are the same. The GOF socket is a double SC socket (refer to figure 42.3) that uses invisible infra-red light (1300 nm) External connections Optical network The fiber interfaces connects a POF to a GOF. Use a GOF to connect two pieces of equipment in the optical network that are more than 50 m apart and less than 1,500 m. Use the fiber interfaces as a pair. The first connects a POF to a GOF, the second connects the GOF to a POF (refer to figure 42.2). Tx Rx figure 42.3: Double SC socket, connection table 42.1: Double SC socket, connection Pin Signal Tx Transmitter Rx Receiver POF POF Refer to figure 42.4 for an example of a GOF cable with a double SC plug GOF ( > 50m) figure 42.2: Optical network If the distance between two devices is less than 100 m, a network splitter can be used in the middle to remove the use of fiber interfaces. Use only the trunk sockets of the network splitter in this case. figure 42.4: GOF with double SC plug Make sure that all GOF cables: Are multi-mode GOF cables. (The system cannot use single mode GOF cables.) Are applicable for light with a wavelength of 1300 nm. Have a maximum attenuation of 2 db/km. table 42.2: Optical network connections Number of connections: 1x optical network socket (POF) 1x optical network socket (GOF) Location: Front and rear sides Power consumption: 4.6 W

237 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Connect a power supply You can connect an external power supply to the external power supply socket of the fiber interface. The fiber interface is supplied with a Kycon KPP-4P plug, which you can connect to this socket (refer to section ). Caution Make sure a diode is installed between the external power supply and the fiber interface (refer to figure 42.5). The system voltage (nominally 40 V) can be higher than the external power supply. The higher system voltage is forced to the external power supply. The external power supply can become defective. The diode should be specified for at least 50 V reverse voltage and a maximum current bigger than what can be expected from the connected load. Max. 48V/5A 42.5 Operation The two LEDs on the fiber interface give information about the condition of the fiber interface. table 42.3: Status LEDs Green (Power) Yellow (Fault) Description Off Off Off; no external power available. Off On Stand-by; external power to POF turned off. On On Operating; external power to POF turned on. On Off Operating, no external power available, but powered from the POF side. Flash Off Fault, no external power available and no protocol received. Flash On Fault, external power available, but no protocol received. KPP-4P Pin 2 KPP-4P Pin 1 figure 42.5: Diode connection

238 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4416 Optical Network Cables 43.2 Connectors Refer to figure 43.2 for details Introduction The optical network cable contains two plastic optical fibers to transmit data and two copper cables to supply power. figure 43.2: Optical network connector (with dustcap) E1 E2 O1 O2 figure 43.3: Optical network connector, connection figure 43.1: Optical network cable table 43.2: Optical network connector, connection Pin Signal Wire E1 +48 V(DC) Copper E2 GND Copper O1 Data Optical fiber O2 Data Optical fiber table 43.1: Optical network cables Type number Cable length LBB4416/ m LBB4416/02 2 m LBB4416/05 5 m LBB4416/10 10 m LBB4416/20 20 m LBB4416/50 50 m LBB4416/ m Except for LBB4416/00, all optical network cables have optical network connectors.

239 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Wiring Refer to figure 43.4 for details about the wires inside the extension cables Technical data table 43.4: Technical data Insulation: LSZH (low smoke/zero halogen), black Outer diameter: 7 mm Power supply wires (2): 1 2 figure 43.4 Wires 7±0.1 table 43.3: Wires Number Signal 1 Protective cloth 2 Insulation 3 Outer sheet 4 Stranded wire 5 Optical fiber 5 Copper, stranded 1 mm 2, red and brown insulation, resistance < Ω/m Optical fibers: PMMA, 1 mm diameter includes cladding, 2 mm diameter includes insulation (black) Numeric aperture: 0.5 Optical attenuation < nm Bending loss < 0.5 db (r = 20 mm, 90 ), according to JIS C6861 Temperature range: -40 to 65 C Pull force: max. 150 N Flame retardant: According to IEC / 60 s Halogen level: According to IEC , ph > 4.3 and conductivity < 10 us/mm Smoke level: According to IEC , light transmittance > 60% 43.4 Custom-made cables Use the LBB4418/00 Cable-connector Tool Kit to make cables from LBB4416/00 Optical Network Cables and LBB4417/00 Optical Network Connectors.

240 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4417/00 Optical Network Connectors Use the LBB4417/00 Optical Network Connectors to make cables from LBB4416/00 Optical Network Cable (100 m) with the LBB4418/00 Cable-connector Tool Kit. figure 44.1: Optical network connector

241 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4418/00 Cable-connector Tool Kit 45.2 Contents Introduction The LBB4418/00 Cable-connector Tool Kit is used to make optical network cables (refer to figure 43.1) from LBB4416/00 Optical Network Cable (100 m) and LBB4417/00 Optical Network Connectors figure 45.2: Tool kit contents figure 45.1: Optical network cable table 45.1: Tool kit contents No. Description Number 1 Spare cutting system (with Allen key) 2 Cable cutter Crimping tool POF positioning/crimping tool 5 Stripping tool POF cutter/stripping tool Torx screwdriver C

242 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en 242 Tool kit supplier: Rennsteig Werkzeuge GmbH Viernau, Thüringen, Germany Supplier type number: PHI Before you use the POF cutter/stripping tool (tool 6), remove the blocking screw with the Torx screwdriver (tool 7). After 1,260 cuts, the POF cutter/stripping tool (tool 6) blocks automatically. In that case, replace the cutting system with the spare cutting system (tool 1) to ensure smooth cuts. Additional spare cutting systems are available as type number LBB4418/50. Caution Apply a film of oil to all tools regularly to stop rust.

243 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Connector components The optical network connector (LBBB4417/00) has 10 parts (refer to figure 45.3 and figure 45.4) figure 45.3: Connector assembly drawing figure 45.4: Connector components table 45.2: Connector components No Description 1 Dust cap 2 Torx screw 3 Front housing 4 Mounting block 5 Socket contacts 6 Ferrules 7 Crimping bush 8 Back housing

244 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Assemble the Cable-connector Introduction This chapter shows how to make the cable-connector. The procedure has these parts: Prepare (refer to section ). Crimp the bush (refer to section ). Remove the ends from the copper wires (refer to section ). Attach the socket contacts (refer to section ). Remove the ends from the optical fibers (refer to section ). Attach the ferrules (refer to section ). Assemble the connector (refer to section ) Cable types There are two types of optical network cables: Type A cables. The plastic optical fibers are adjacent to each other (figure 45.5 shows both cable ends). Type B cables. The plastic optical fibers are opposite to each other (refer to figure 45.5, both cable ends are identical) Prepare Do as follows: 1 Use the cable cutter (tool 2) to cut the optical network cable to the correct length. Light decreases in intensity through the length of the cable. The length of an optical network cable must be less than 50 m. 2 Examine the cable type (refer to section ). Some steps in the procedure change because of the cable type. 3 Disassemble an optical network connector. An optical network connector has 10 parts (refer to section 45.3). 4 Push the cable through the back housing (refer to figure 45.6). R B B figure 45.6: Back housing on cable A R B 5 Push the cable through the stripping tool (tool 5) to the mechanical stop (refer to figure 45.7). 6 Use the stripping tool to remove the outer sheath of the cable. B R R B = Red = Brown A figure 45.5: Cable types figure 45.7: Stripping the cable

245 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Crimp the bush Do as follows: 7 Put the cable end through crimping bush to the end of the outer sheath. 8 Use the crimping tool (tool 3, refer to figure 45.9) to attach the crimping bush to the outer sheath. The crimping bush stops the cable from rotating in the connector. The crimping tool (tool 3) makes the circular shape of the cable cross-section and the crimping bush at the end of the outer sheath into a hexagonal shape. Before you crimp the bush, make sure that both plastic optical fibers are parallel to a flat side of the hexagonal cross-section (refer to figure 45.8). figure 45.9: Crimping the bush R B A B R B Remove the ends of the copper wires Do as follows: 9 Hold the crimping bush in position I with the stripping tool. Cut the copper wires at position II (refer to figure 45.10) with the cable cutter (tool 2). B R R B = Red = Brown I A figure 45.8: Cross-section transformation figure 45.10: Cutting a copper wire II

246 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Push the copper wires to the mechanical stop of the stripping tool (tool 5, refer to figure 45.11). Remove the red and brown insulations from the copper wires Attach the socket contacts Do as follows: 11 Put a socket contact in the crimping tool (tool 3, refer to figure 45.12). The upper part of the crimping tool contains a ridge to put the socket contact correctly in the tool (refer to figure 45.13). figure 45.11: Stripping a copper wire figure 45.12: Crimping a socket contact (1) figure 45.13: Crimping a socket contact (2)

247 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Put one of the bare, copper wires into the contact area of the socket contact. Close the crimping tool to crimp the socket contact onto the copper wire (refer to figure 45.14) Remove the sheath from the optical fibers Proceed as follows: 14 Put the plastic optical fibers into the POF cutter/stripping tool (tool 6). The optical fiber that is to be cut must be put in the small guide hole. The other optical fiber must be put in the large guide hole (refer to figure 45.16). Push the cable until the crimping bush is against the stop (refer to figure 45.17). figure 45.14: Crimping a socket contact (2) 13 Repeat steps 11 and 12 for the other bare copper wire. Refer to figure to see the result of this part of the cable-connector mounting procedure. figure 45.16: Cutting a fiber (1) A figure 45.15: Mounted socket contacts B figure 45.17: Cutting a fiber (2)

248 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Close the tool to hold the cable and pull the trigger to cut the optical fiber (refer to figure 45.18). 18 Close the tool and pull the fiber out to remove the sheath. Do not forget to remove the piece of sheath from the tool. 19 Repeat steps 17 and 18 for the other fiber in the cable. Refer to figure to see the result of this part of the cable-connector mounting procedure. figure 45.18: Cutting a fiber (3) 16 Repeat steps 14 and 15 for the other plastic optical fiber in the cable. Both fibers now have the correct length. 17 Put one of the optical fibers into the front part of the POF cutter/stripping tool (tool 6, refer to figure 45.19). A B figure 45.20: Stripped optical fibers figure 45.19: Stripping a fiber

249 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Attach the ferrules Do as follows: 20 Put a ferrule into the spring-loaded stop of the POF positioning/crimping tool (tool 4, refer to figure 45.21). 22 Put one plastic optical fiber into the ferrule in the spring-loaded stop of the POF positioning tool (refer to figure 45.23). figure 45.23: Crimping ferrules (1) figure 45.21: Inserting a ferrule 21 Turn the small lever to lock the ferrule (refer to figure 45.22). 23 Close and open the tool to crimp the ferrule onto the core of the fiber. 24 Repeat steps 20 to 23 for the other fiber in the cable. The ferrules only have been crimped on the core of the optical plastic fiber. The next step crimps the ferrules on the sheaths of the fibers. 25 Put both ferrules in the crimping tool (tool 3, refer to figure 45.24). figure 45.22: Locking a ferrule figure 45.24: Crimping ferrules (2)

250 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Crimp the ferrules on the sheath using the crimping tool (tool 3, refer to figure 45.25). Refer to figure for the result of this part of the cable-connector assembly procedure Assemble the connector Before you start to assemble the connector, the copper wires and the plastic optical fibers for must be correctly put in the connector. The copper wires will be attached to the upper part of the connector, the optical fibers will be attached to the lower part of the connector (refer to figure 45.27). When replacing a connector, always first check the wiring in the connector at the other end. E1 E2 figure 45.25: Crimping ferrules (3) O1 O2 figure 45.27: Front view of connector A figure 45.26: Ferrules on fibers B table 45.3: Optical network connector details Pin Signal Wire E1 +48V(DC) Copper E2 GND Copper O1 Data Optical fiber O2 Data Optical fiber Refer to the wiring diagram (figure 45.28) and figure and figure E1 E2 RED BROWN E1 E2 O1 O1 O2 BLACK (2x) figure 45.28: Wiring diagram O2

251 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en 251 E1 E2 R B E1 E2 R O1 O2 A R B = Red = Brown A B O1 O2 figure 45.29: Wiring diagram applied to type A optical network cables E1 E2 R B E1 E2 R B B O1 O2 R B = Red = Brown B O1 O2 figure 45.30: Wiring diagram applied to type B optical network cables

252 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en 252 Where applicable, the procedure to assemble the connectors for both types of cable is shown in the figures. Do as follows: 27 Make sure the ends of the cables and the plastic optical fibers correct (refer to figure 45.31). 29 Put the socket contacts in the mounting block (refer to figure 45.33). Type A cables only: One of the connectors attached to a type A cable, the red and brown copper wires must crossover as shown in the wiring diagram (refer to figure 45.29). R A B R B B A R R B = Red = Brown B R B B B A R R B B R A B R figure 45.31: Copper wires and fibers 28 Put the ferrules in the mounting block (refer to figure 45.32) R B = Red = Brown B figure 45.33: Mounting block and back housing 30 Put the mounting block in the back housing (refer to figure 45.34) B A B figure 45.32: Mounting block and back housing figure 45.34: Mounting block/back housing assembly

253 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en Click the front housing on the mounting block/back housing assembly (refer to figure 45.35). 33 Tighten the Torx screw using the Torx screwdriver (tool 7, refer to figure 45.37). figure 45.35: Mounting the front housing 32 Insert the Torx screw into the front housing (refer to figure 45.36). figure 45.37: Tightening the Torx screw 34 Put the dust cap on the connector to protect the plastic optical fibers (refer to figure 45.38). figure 45.36: Inserting the Torx screw figure 45.38: Dust cap on connector

254 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Installation Devices en LBB4419/00 Cable Couplers You can use the LBB4419/00 Cable Couplers to connect optical network cables to each other. A cable coupler causes optical attenuation. Each cable coupler decreases the maximum distance between two devices in the optical network (normally 50 meters) with 20 meters. figure 46.1: Cable coupler (with dustcaps)

255 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en 255 Section 7 - Peripheral Devices

256 1 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board 47.1 Introduction Use the DCN-DDB Data Distribution Board to connect hall displays to the system Controls, connectors and indicators The data distribution board (refer to figure 47.1) contains: 1 DCN cable - Connects the data distribution board to the DCN (refer to section ). 2 J10 jumper block - Selects the power supply of the data distribution board (refer to section ). 3 S8 switches - Configure the data distribution board (refer to section ). 4 RS232 port - To connect the data distribution board to a hall display (refer to section ). 5 Parallel inputs (connector) - To make remote controls (refer to section 47.6). 6 Parallel inputs (solder pads) - To make remote controls (refer to section 47.6). 7 Parallel outputs (solder pads) - To make remote controls (refer to section 47.6). 8 De-init switch (local) - Erase the current address of the data distribution board (refer to section 8.7). 9 Parallel outputs (connector) - To make remote controls (refer to section 47.6). 10 De-init switch (remote)- Erase the address of the data distribution board from a remote site (refer to section ). 11 Power supply connector - Connects an external power supply to the data distribution board (refer to section ) X7 J10 SUP GND X ON S8 X X20 X21 5 VC+ D00 D01 D02 D03 D04 D05 D06 D07 GND VC+ D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 GND +5V U00 U01 U02 U03 U04 U05 U06 U07 GND +5V U08 U09 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 GND figure 47.1: Top view of the data distribution board

257 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Configuration Overview Configure the data distribution board with the S8 switches (refer to table 47.1). table 47.1: S8 Dip switch settings (* = default) Switch Position Description S8-1 ON OFF* S8-2 ON OFF* S8-3 ON OFF* S8-4 ON OFF* S8-5 ON OFF* S8-6 ON OFF* S8-7 ON OFF* S8-8 ON OFF* RS232 enabled RS232 disabled Active mode Passive mode baud 9600 baud Reserved Reserved Address bit 0 = 1 Address bit 0 = 0 Address bit 1 = 1 Address bit 1 = 0 Address bit 2 = 1 Address bit 2 = RS232 port You can enable or disable the RS232 port of the data distribution board with the S8-1 switch. Set the baudrate with the S8-3 switch. When you connect the data distribution board to a hall display, you must enable the RS232 port of the data distribution board. The baudrate for all hall displays is 19,200 baud. Only the numeric display can also operate with a 9,600 baud connection. 1 figure 47.2: RS232 port, connection table 47.2: RS232 port, connection Pin Definition Description Not connected 2 RxD Receive Data 3 TxD Transmit Data Not connected 5 SG Signal Ground Not connected 7 RTS Request To Send 8 CTS Clear To Send Not connected table 47.3: RS232 port, details Number of connections: 1x female 9 pole SUB-D socket Location: Component side Data format: 9600, baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity Signal levels: EIA RS232-C interface specifications

258 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Mode Introduction Set the mode of the data distribution board with the S8-3 switch. The data distribution board can be: A passive unit that receives data from the central control unit (passive mode). An active unit that also transmits data to the central control unit (active mode) Passive mode You must put the data distribution board in the passive mode when: You use data distribution board to send data to a hall display. You use data distribution board for speak slowly or help signaling. You only use the parallel outputs of the data distribution board. If the data distribution board is in the passive mode, you must give it an address (refer to section ). This address defines the application of the data distribution board. When you start the system for the first time, you must push the de-init switch of the data distribution board to send its address to the central control unit (refer to section 8.7). When you use the central control unit to erase the addresses of all units (refer to section 8.7), you must not push the de-init switch again. The central control unit remembers the addresses of the passive data distribution boards when it is started again Active mode You must put the data distribution board in the active mode when you use the parallel inputs of the data distribution board. The maximum number of data distribution boards in the system is 15. If the data distribution board is in active mode, the central control unit gives it an address. The system ignores the passive mode address of the data distribution board in the active mode (refer to section ). When you start the system for the first time, you must push the de-init switch of the data distribution board to obtain an address. When you use the central control unit to erase the addresses of all units (refer to section 8.7), you must push the de-init switch again to obtain a new address. The central control unit does not remember the addresses of the active data distribution boards when it is started again Addresses If necessary, set the address of the data distribution board with the S8-6, S8-7 and S8-8 switches. This address is only used when the data distribution board is in the passive mode (refer to section ). The address defines the application of the data distribution board (refer to table 47.4). table 47.4: Addresses Address S8-6 S8-7 S8-8 Description Numeric display (refer to section ) Alpha-numeric display 1 (refer to section ) Alpha-numeric display 2 (refer to section ) Status display (e.g. synoptic display, refer to section ) Reserved Speak slowly signaling (refer to section ) Help signaling (interpreter booth 1 to 16, refer to section ) Help signaling (interpreter booth 17 to 31, refer to section ).

259 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Hall displays Communication The data distribution board sends serial data to the hall display through the RS232 port. The serial data consists of ASCII text with ANSI escape codes for special functions. Refer to table 47.5 for the descriptions of <CR> and <LF> control characters. table 47.5: ASCII control characters Character Description <CR> Moves the cursor to the first location on the current text line. <LF> Moves the cursor one row down in the current column The data distribution board only sends ANSI codes and binary data to status displays ANSI support Introduction The connected hall display must be able to process all the ANSI escape codes that are listed below. Not all of these codes are currently in use, but they must be implemented in the hall display for future compatibility Cursor location <esc>[<line number>;<column number>h <esc>[<line number>;<column number>f figure 47.3: Cursor location Moves the cursor to the specified location. If no text line number and column number is specified, the cursor moves to the upper left corner of the hall display (text line 1, column 1) Cursor up <esc>[<numlines>a figure 47.4: Cursor up Moves the cursor up in the same column. The number of text lines that it is moved is defined by numlines. If the cursor is already in the first text line, the hall display must ignore this escape function. If numlines is omitted, the data distribution board moves the cursor one text line Cursor down <esc>[<numlines>b figure 47.5: Cursor down Moves the cursor down in the same column. The number of text lines that it is moved is defined by numlines. If the cursor is already in the last text line, the hall display must ignore this escape function. If numlines is omitted, the data distribution board moves the cursor one text line Cursor right <esc>[<numlines>c figure 47.6: Cursor right Moves the cursor to the right in the same text line. The number of columns that it is moved is defined by numlines. If the cursor is already in the last column, the hall display must ignore this escape function. If numlines is omitted, the data distribution board moves the cursor one location.

260 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Cursor left <esc>[<numlines>d figure 47.7: Cursor left Moves the cursor to the left in the same text line. The number of columns that it is moved is defined by numlines. If the cursor is already in the first column, the hall display must ignore this escape function. If numlines is omitted, the data distribution board assumes a default value of 1 column Erase display <esc>[2j figure 47.8: Erase display Erases the hall display and moves the cursor to its home location (text line 1, column 1) Erase line <esc>[k figure 47.9: Erase line Erases all characters from the location of the cursor to the end of the text line (including the character at the cursor location). The cursor remains in the same place Numeric display On a numeric display, the data distribution board can show parliamentary voting results and a voting timer. A numeric display does not require a control PC. The data distribution board sends six text lines to the hall display (refer to table 47.6). Each text line contains six locations. table 47.6: Numeric display Line Item 1 Voting timer 2 Number of present delegates 3 Number of delegates who voted Yes 4 Number of delegates who voted No. 5 Number of delegates who voted Abstain. 6 Number of delegates who did not vote. If there is no voting timer, the first text line is empty. The voting timer is a number of four digits (two for the minutes, two for the seconds). There is no separator between the minutes and the seconds. The separator must be part of the fixed text on the hall display. Example: A parliamentary voting session in progress. There are 14 minutes and 25 seconds left. In the room are 1,235 delegates present: 945 delegates voted Yes, 30 delegates voted No, 255 delegates voted Abstain and 5 delegates did not vote. Refer to figure for the data that the data distribution board sends to the hall display. An underscore represents a space. <ESC>[2J1425<CR><LF> 1235<CR><LF> _945<CR><LF> 30<CR><LF> _255<CR><LF> 5 figure 47.10: Numeric display, example (1)

261 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en 261 Refer to figure for the data that the hall display shows. Refer to figure for the data that the data distribution board sends to the hall display. Time: Present: Yes: No: Abstain: Not Voted: figure 47.11: Numeric display, example (2) Alphanumeric display On an alphanumeric display, the data distribution board shows parliamentary voting results, microphone information and messages. An alphanumeric display requires a control PC and the Text/Status Display software module. <spaces> represents a sequence of maximum 33 spaces. <ESC>[2JText line 1<spaces> <CR><LF> Text line 2<spaces> <CR><LF> Text line 3<spaces> <CR><LF> Text line 4<spaces> <CR><LF> <ESC>[5;1HVoting : 1<ESC>[5;16H Time: <ESC>[6;16H Yes: <ESC>[7;1HPresent <ESC>[7:11H: <ESC>[7;16H No: <ESC>[8:1HNot Voted : <ESC>[8;11H: <ESC>[8;16H Abstain: <ESC>[9;1HRollCall <ESC>[10;1H<Screenline> <ESC>[6;27H 945<ESC>[7H;27H 30<ESC>[8;27H 255<ESC>[7;12H1235<ESC>[8;12H 5<ESC>[5;28H14:25 figure 47.12: Alphanumeric display, example (1) Refer to figure for the data that the hall display shows. Refer to the applicable Software User Manual for instructions that tell you how to operate the Text/Status Display software module. The system can handle two different alphanumeric displays at the same time. There is no difference between hall display 1 and hall display 2, but the data distribution boards have different addresses. The alphanumeric display must consist of 10 text lines that contain 33 characters. When the display is larger, the additional space will not be used. figure 47.13: Alphanumeric display, example (2) Example: A parliamentary voting session is in progress. There are 14 minutes and 25 seconds left. In the room are 1,235 delegates present: 945 delegates voted Yes, 30 delegates voted No, 255 delegates voted Abstain and 5 delegates did not vote. The vote subject text is Text line 1, Text line 2, Text line 3, Text line 4.

262 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Status display On a status display, the data distribution board shows the status of a parliamentary voting session. A status display requires a control PC and the Text/Status Display software module. Refer to the applicable Software User Manual for instructions that tell you how to operate the Text/Status Display software module. To show the information, the status display receives either an ANSI erase display code (refer to section ) or a display update command. This display update command is a dump of status information (752 bytes). It consists of: A start code of two byte (A5 A5). For the first 1,500 devices in the system, a device nibble that contains the status values of the contribution devices (refer to table 47.7). table 47.7: Numeric display Value Status 0 The delegate at this unit is not present. 1 The delegate voted No. 2 The delegate voted Abstain. 4 The delegate voted Yes. 8 The delegate is present, but has not voted. If there are less than 1,500 devices in the system, the remaining nibbles are always set to 00. Two device nibbles together form a device byte. The location of the device nibbles in the device bytes depends on the alphabetically sorted seat number list in the installation file on the DCN control PC. Example: A system contains 6 units (refer to table 47.8). For this system, the entire display update command will be: A5 A (and 747 bytes with value 00) figure 47.14: Status display table 47.8: Example Seat number Update command Status Status value 0001 byte 1, high nibble Not present 0 00A1 byte 1, low nibble Present 8 00A2 byte 2, high nibble Yes 4 00B1 byte 2, low nibble No 1 00C3 byte 3, high nibble Abstain byte 3, low nibble Present 8

263 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Signaling Speak slowly signaling The interpreter desks (DCN-IDESK) have a Slow button. With this button, the interpreters can activate an indicator that tells the current speaker to speak slowly. This function of the interpreter desk must always be used along with the data distribution board. Refer to figure for the physical connections. Refer to figure for a circuit diagram for speak slowly signaling. VC+ R External On PCB V 50 V(DC) _ + I 125 ma I 125 ma VC+ D00 D01 I 125 ma D00..D07 + _ V 50 V(DC) I 125 ma D02 I 125 ma I 125 ma D03 D04 On PCB I 125 ma I 125 ma D05 D06 GND I 125 ma D07 GND VC+ D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 figure 47.16: Circuit diagram The first request to speak slowly activates parallel output D00 of the data distribution board. The second request (from a different interpreter booth) activates parallel output D01, the third request activates parallel output D02 etc. The maximum number of activated parallel outputs is eight (D00 to D07). D13 D14 D15 GND figure 47.15: Physical connections The parallel outputs are also available on a 20-pole connector (refer to table 47.9).

264 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Help signaling The interpreter desks (DCN-IDESK) have a Help button. With this button, the interpreters can activate an indicator that tells the operator or chairman that they need assistance. This function of the interpreter desk must always be used along with the data distribution board. Refer to figure for the physical connections. Refer to figure for a circuit diagram for help signaling. VC+ R External On PCB _ + V 50 V(DC) I 125 ma I 125 ma I 125 ma VC+ D00 D01 D02 I 125 ma D00..D07 D08..D15 + _ V 50 V(DC) I 125 ma D03 I 125 ma I 125 ma D04 D05 On PCB I 125 ma I 125 ma D06 D07 GND GND figure 47.18: Circuit diagram _ + V 50 V(DC) I 125 ma I 125 ma I 125 ma I 125 ma I 125 ma I 125 ma VC+ D08 D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 Requests for assistance that come from interpreter booths 1 through 16 activate parallel outputs D00 to D15 on the data distribution board with address 254. Requests for assistance that come from interpreter booth 17 to 31 activate parallel outputs D00 to D15 on the data distribution board with address 255. I 125 ma D14 I 125 ma D15 GND figure 47.17: Physical connections The parallel outputs are also available on a20-pole connector (refer to table 47.9).

265 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en Remote controls You can use the parallel inputs and parallel outputs as remote controls. For example, to switch on lamps, open doors or close curtains in the room. The parallel inputs and parallel outputs are also available on a 20-pole connector (refer to table 47.9). All parallel inputs and parallel outputs form pairs. For example, parallel input U00 controls parallel outputs D00. table 47.9: Parallel inputs and outputs Parallel inputs Parallel outputs Pad Pin Pad Pin VC+ 1 VC+ 1 U00 2 D00 2 U01 3 D01 3 U02 4 D02 4 U03 5 D03 5 U04 5 D04 5 U05 7 D05 7 U06 8 D06 8 U07 9 D07 9 GND 10 GND 10 VC+ 11 VC+ 11 U08 12 D08 12 U09 13 D09 13 U10 14 D10 14 U11 15 D11 15 U12 16 D12 16 U13 17 D13 17 U14 18 D14 18 U15 reserved D15 reserved GND 20 GND 20 The parallel inputs do not only control the associated parallel output on the same data distribution board. They also control the associated parallel outputs on all other data distribution boards that are: In the active mode. In the passive mode and do not have address 253, 254 or 255. Do not use a parallel output for more than one purpose. For example, parallel input D00 of a distribution board does not only control parallel output U00 of the same data distribution board. It also controls all the parallel output U00 of all the other data distribution boards that are in the active mode or in the passive mode and do not have address 253, 254 or 255.

266 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en 266 Refer to figure for the physical connections of the parallel inputs. Refer to figure for the physical connections of the parallel outputs. External On PCB External On PCB +5V U00 VC+ D00 U01 U02 + D01 D02 U03 U04 V 50 V(DC) _ I 125 ma D03 D04 U05 D05 U06 D06 U07 D07 GND GND +5V U08 VC+ D08 Reserved U09 U10 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 V 50 V(DC) + _ I 125 ma I 125 ma Reserved D09 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 GND GND figure 47.19: Parallel inputs figure 47.20: Parallel outputs

267 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en 267 Refer to figure for a circuit diagram to connect the parallel inputs. VC Power supply You can connect an external power supply to the power supply connector (refer to figure 47.22). The external power supply only gives power to the data distribution board. It does not give power to the DCN. I 125 ma D00..D07 D08..D15 + _ V 50 V(DC) 10-40V(DC) GND On PCB GND figure 47.21: Circuit diagram figure 47.22: Power supply 47.7 Installation Data distribution board Install the data distribution board in the hall display. table 47.11: Power supply Supply voltage (DCN or external): V(DC) Current consumption (DCN): < V(DC) table 47.10: Physical characteristics Dimensions (h x w): 100 x 200 mm Weight: approximately 300 g DCN Use the DCN cable to connect the data distribution board to the DCN. You cannot make a loop-through in the DCN with the data distribution board. You connect the data distribution board to the DCN with a trunk splitter (LBB4114/00, LBB4115/00) to bypass the data distribution board.

268 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en 268 You can enable or disable the connected external power supply with the J10 jumper block (refer to figure 47.23) Remote de-init switch You can erase the address of the data distribution board from a remote site with connector X77 (refer to figure 47.1). This 10-pole connector has connections for a de-init switch and a de-init LED. A B J10 J10 table 47.13: X77 remote initialization connector Pin Signal 1 +5 V 2 Init 3 Initialisation LED, anode 4 Initialisation LED, cathode 5 Not connected 6 Not connected 7 Not connected 8 Not connected 9 Not connected 10 Not connected figure 47.23: Power supply The remote de-init switch must be connected between pins 1 and 2. The de-init LED must be connected between pins 3 and 4. table 47.12: Jumper setting Position Power A System power supply B External power supply

269 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en LBB4157/00 Chip Card Encoder 48.1 Introduction With the LBB4157/00 Chip Card Encoder and the ID-Card Encoder software module, you can configure DCN-IDCRD Chip Cards (refer to chapter 49) Operation Refer to the applicable Software User Manual for instructions that tell you how to operate the ID-Card Encoder software module Installation Caution Before you install the chip card encoder, disconnect the PC from the mains power supply. Electrical discharges from the mains power supply can kill you. To connect the chip card encoder to a PC: 1 Disconnect the keyboard from the PC. 2 Connect the chip card encoder (1) to the PC with the plug of the serial cable (2). 3 Connect the chip card encoder (1) to the PC with the PS/2 plug (3). 4 Connect the keyboard to the PS/2 socket (4) of the chip card encoder figure 48.1: Chip card encoder 4

270 DCN Next Generation Installation and User Instructions Peripheral Devices en DCN-IDCRD Chip Cards With the DCN-IDCRD Chip Cards delegates and chairmen can identify themselves to the system. You can use the chip cards to give the delegates and chairmen access to: The microphones of the contribution devices. The voting functions on the contribution devices. The intercom functions on the contribution devices. To configure the chip cards, you must use the LBB4157/00 Chip Card Encoder (refer to chapter 48). Refer to table 49.1 for the characteristics of the DCN- IDCRD Chip Cards. table 49.1: Card characteristics Number of cards: 100 Label area: 72 x 24 mm Memory: 4096 bits (512 bytes) Dimensions (h x w x d): 54 x 85.7 x 0.76 mm (conform ISO ) You can put labels that are larger than 72 x 24 mm on the rear of the chip card. Refer to the Delegate Database Software User Manual for instructions that tell you where to find the code of the card in the chip. figure 49.1: Chip card

DCN Wireless. Installation and User Instructions Wireless discussion system

DCN Wireless. Installation and User Instructions Wireless discussion system DCN Wireless en Installation and User Instructions Wireless discussion system DCN Wireless Installation and User Instructions Important Safeguards en 3 Important Safeguards Before you install or operate

More information

DCN-D Conference Delegate Units DCN-DS/L, DCN-DCS, DCN-DV, DCN-DVCS. Installation and Operation manual

DCN-D Conference Delegate Units DCN-DS/L, DCN-DCS, DCN-DV, DCN-DVCS. Installation and Operation manual DCN-D Conference Delegate Units DCN-DS/L, DCN-DCS, DCN-DV, DCN-DVCS en Installation and Operation manual DCN-D Conference Delegate Units Table of Contents en 3 Table of Contents 1 Safety 5 2 About this

More information

DCN Next Generation 2.40 Release Notes

DCN Next Generation 2.40 Release Notes DCN Next Generation 2.40 Release Notes en Release Notes DCN Next Generation 2.40 Release Notes en 3 Table of contents 1 Introduction... 4 2 Release 2.40... 5 3 Release 2.12... 6 4 Release 2.10... 7 5

More information

DCN Wireless. Installation and User Instructions Wireless coverage test kit

DCN Wireless. Installation and User Instructions Wireless coverage test kit DCN Wireless en Installation and User Instructions Wireless coverage test kit DCN Wireless Installation and User Instructions Wireless coverage test kit en 3 Important Safeguards Before you use the DCN

More information

Bosch DCN Next Generation Data Brochure

Bosch DCN Next Generation Data Brochure Bosch DCN Next Generation Data Brochure Table of Contents i Digital Congress Network - Next Generation Introduction Introduction Applications 7 Applications 7 Discussion Units 7 Discussion Units 7 DCN

More information

INTEGRUS. LBB 3222/04 6-Channel Interpreter Desk with Loudspeaker. LBB 3422/20 Integrus Audio Input and Interpreters Module

INTEGRUS. LBB 3222/04 6-Channel Interpreter Desk with Loudspeaker. LBB 3422/20 Integrus Audio Input and Interpreters Module INTEGRUS en Installation and User Instructions Integrus Language Distribution System LBB 3222/04 6-Channel Interpreter Desk with Loudspeaker LBB 3422/20 Integrus Audio Input and Interpreters Module INTEGRUS

More information

INTEGRUS BOSCH DIGITAL INFRA-RED LANGUAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Installation and Operating Manual

INTEGRUS BOSCH DIGITAL INFRA-RED LANGUAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Installation and Operating Manual INTEGRUS DIGITAL INFRA-RED LANGUAGE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Installation and Operating Manual LBB 3222/04 6-Channel Interpreter Desk with Loudspeaker LBB 3422/10 Symmetrical Audio Input and Interpreters Module

More information

DCS Infrared Transmitter. User Manual. Digital Conference System. Danish Interpretation Systems

DCS Infrared Transmitter. User Manual. Digital Conference System. Danish Interpretation Systems DCS 6000 User Manual Digital Conference System IT 6108 Infrared Transmitter Danish Interpretation Systems DIS Copyright 2003 Danish Interpretation Systems No part of this publication may be reproduced

More information

RT12-240V/2.4kW Rectifier Specification

RT12-240V/2.4kW Rectifier Specification The RT12-240V/2.4kW is a switched mode rectifier (SMR) module that delivers up to 2.4kW of output power (and up to 11A output current) into a 240V nominal DC system. The RT12 suits AC supply voltages between

More information

FL MC 2000E (SM40) LC

FL MC 2000E (SM40) LC IEC 61850 fiber optic converter with LC fiber optic connection (1310 nm) to convert 100Base-Tx to single- or multi-mode fiber glass Data sheet 3205_en_C 1 Description PHOENIX CONTACT 2014-04-04 2 Features

More information

DCN Next Generation Data Brochure

DCN Next Generation Data Brochure DCN Next Generation Data Brochure Digital Congress Network Next Generation 1 Digital Congress Network Next Generation Digital Congress Network Next Generation 3 Examples 9 Contribution equipment 19 Interpretation

More information

RT4F-48V/50A-WAC RECTIFIER

RT4F-48V/50A-WAC RECTIFIER The RT4F-48V/50A-WAC is a switched mode rectifier (SMR) module designed to provide up to 58A of output current into a 48V nominal system, over a wide range of AC input voltage. This rectifier has been

More information

RT7-48V/6kW Specification

RT7-48V/6kW Specification The RT7-48V/6kW is a 3 phase, active power factor corrected, switched mode rectifier (SMR) module designed to provide up to 6kW of output power (100A nominal) into a 48V nominal system. This rectifier

More information

RT4B-110V/12A RECTIFIER

RT4B-110V/12A RECTIFIER The RT4B-110V/12A is a switched mode rectifier (SMR) module designed to provide up to 12A of output current into a 110V nominal system. It can be used with or without a cooling fan. With a fan it runs

More information

Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) unit, 24 VDC, spring terminals. unit, 24 VDC, spring terminals, XC version

Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) unit, 24 VDC, spring terminals. unit, 24 VDC, spring terminals, XC version Ordering Data DATA SHEET TU520 Terminal Unit 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 214 400 R0001 1SAP 414 400 R0001 TU520-ETH, PROFINET I/O terminal unit, 24 VDC, spring

More information

Safety Standards. Model Number: Unit Weight:

Safety Standards. Model Number: Unit Weight: MEA-250A24C Highlights & Features Meet Efficiency Level VI Safety Approvals to IEC 60601-1 3.1 Ed. & IEC 60950-1 Compliant with IEC 60601-1-2 3 th and 4 th Ed. Requirements IP22 ingress protection rating

More information

RT9-48V/1.4kW Rectifier Specification

RT9-48V/1.4kW Rectifier Specification The RT9-48V/1.4kW is a switched mode rectifier (SMR) module that delivers up to 1.4kW of output power (and up to 30A output current) into a 48V nominal DC system. The RT9 suits AC supply voltages between

More information

RT4F-110V/25A RECTIFIER

RT4F-110V/25A RECTIFIER The RT4F-110V/25A is a hot-pluggable switched mode rectifier (SMR) module designed to provide up to 25A of output current into a 110V nominal system. Examples of such systems are 60 cells lead acid (136V

More information

TU531, TU532 Terminal Unit

TU531, TU532 Terminal Unit Ordering Data DATA SHEET TU531, TU532 Terminal Unit 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 217 200 R0001 1SAP 217 000 R0001 1SAP 417 000 R0001 TU531, terminal unit, 230 VAC,

More information

LED W RGBA User Manual

LED W RGBA User Manual LED- 245-1W RGBA User Manual Please read the instructions carefully before use CONTENTS 1. Safety Instructions...2 2. Technical Specifications...3 3. How To Set The Unit...4 3.1 Control Panel...4 3.2 Main

More information

Arc protection relay. Features Three-phase overcurrent function. Application

Arc protection relay. Features Three-phase overcurrent function. Application Arc protection relay REA 10_ Page 1 Issued: May 1999 Status: New Data subject to change without notice Features Three-phase overcurrent function Loop-type or radial sensor fibre for arc detection Two high-speed

More information

AS1008-P AS1026-P AS2008-P AS2024-P User Manual

AS1008-P AS1026-P AS2008-P AS2024-P User Manual Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet PoE+ Unmanaged Switches AS1008-P AS1026-P AS2008-P AS2024-P User Manual Version 1.0.0.1 Sep 2017 Contents Compliances and Safety Statements... 3 1. AS1000 Series Product

More information

Safety Standards. Model Number:

Safety Standards. Model Number: PMC Highlights & Features Universal AC input range from 85Vac to 264Vac without power de-rating High operating ambient temperature, > 60 o C de-rating power High MTBF > 700,000 hrs. as per Telcordia SR-332

More information

AO523 Analog Input Module

AO523 Analog Input Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET AO523 Analog Input Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 250 200 R0001 1SAP 450 200 R0001 AO523, analog output module, 16 AO, U/I, 12 bits

More information

RT4F-120V/20A-WAC RECTIFIER

RT4F-120V/20A-WAC RECTIFIER The RT4F-120V/20A-WAC is a switched mode rectifier/charger module designed to provide up to 20A of output current into a 120V nominal system. This charger has been designed for use in conjunction with

More information

ATS-16 HV USER MANUAL. Automatic Transfer Switch 16A / 230Vac V090318

ATS-16 HV USER MANUAL. Automatic Transfer Switch 16A / 230Vac V090318 ATS-16 HV Automatic Transfer Switch 16A / 230Vac USER MANUAL V090318 SAFETY Intended use The ATS-16 HV device serves as a power source selector to provide improved power supply for connected loads. ATS-16

More information

TF501, TF521 Terminal Bases

TF501, TF521 Terminal Bases Ordering Data DATA SHEET TF501, TF521 Terminal Bases 1 Ordering Data Part No. Scope of delivery Product life cycle status 1SAP 117 000 R0271 1SAP 317 000 R0271 1SAP 117 200 R0271 1SAP 317 200 R0271 TF501-CMS,

More information

Test and Measurements Automated Systems Component Device Testing Semiconductor Processing & Burn-in Aerospace & Satellite Testing

Test and Measurements Automated Systems Component Device Testing Semiconductor Processing & Burn-in Aerospace & Satellite Testing The TSR10 is a 10 kw, 3-phase input voltage 360-440 VAC power supply with an adjustable DC output voltage between 0.5 V and 50 V and output current between 0.5 A and 200 A. The power supply has been designed

More information

TRC-190 User s Manual

TRC-190 User s Manual User s Manual Edition 3.2, May 2017 www.moxa.com/product 2017 Moxa Inc. All rights reserved. User s Manual The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only

More information

INSTRUCTION MANUAL TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY GKAD1

INSTRUCTION MANUAL TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY GKAD1 INSTRUCTION MANUAL TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY GKAD1 TOSHIBA Corporation 2004 All Rights Reserved. ( Ver. 1.6 ) Safety Precautions Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully. This

More information

SAMURAI SCAN 50 LED-SC50D. User Guide. Innovation, Quality, Performance. Professional Entertainment Technology 19-

SAMURAI SCAN 50 LED-SC50D. User Guide. Innovation, Quality, Performance. Professional Entertainment Technology 19- SAMURAI SCAN 50 LED-SC50D Innovation, Quality, Performance User Guide Professional Entertainment Technology 19- EC Declaration of Conformity We declare that our products (lighting equipments) comply with

More information

CompactBlock Guard I/O EtherNet/IP Safety Modules

CompactBlock Guard I/O EtherNet/IP Safety Modules Installation Instructions CompactBlock Guard I/O EtherNet/IP Safety Modules Catalog Numbers 1791ES-IB8XOBV4, 1791ES-IB16 Topic Page Important User Information 2 North American Hazardous Location Approval

More information

IGLOO IGLOO EASY INSTRUCTION MANUAL

IGLOO IGLOO EASY INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISH EASY C695 C698 INSTRUCTION MANUAL PRELIMINARY Congratulations on choosing a Clay Paky product! We thank you for your custom. Please note that this product, as all the others in the rich Clay Paky

More information

EH-RIO IP67 Profibus-DP I/O modules

EH-RIO IP67 Profibus-DP I/O modules Installation Instructions EH-RIO IP67 Profibus-DP I/O modules (RIO-PBXDP8M12, -PBXDP8M8, -PBYTP8M12, -PBYTP8M8, -PBXYP8M12, -PBXYP8M8) M12 Style Connectors M8 Style Connectors 43819 The EH-RIO IP67 Profibus-DP

More information

VER05 Series. xxx Series. 5 Watt. AC-DC Power Supplies. Models & Ratings. Input. Output

VER05 Series. xxx Series. 5 Watt.   AC-DC Power Supplies. Models & Ratings. Input. Output 5 Watt xxx Series Energy Efficiency Level VI Barrel Jack & USB Versions Interchangeable Mains Connectors Included Universal Input Output Voltages from 5.0 V to 12.0 V Class II Construction Low Cost B R

More information

MSR 2400R. Rugged Power System for Military and Heavy Duty Applications

MSR 2400R. Rugged Power System for Military and Heavy Duty Applications MSR 2400R Rugged Power System for Military and Heavy Duty Applications 2400 W modular power system Power supply or battery charging systems Parallel n+1 connection, up to 90A Series connection, up to 360VDC

More information

HPA4202 1/5. 2-Channel High Power Multi-Impedance Amplifier. General Description. Features. Applications. AtlasIED.com. HPA4202 Front.

HPA4202 1/5. 2-Channel High Power Multi-Impedance Amplifier. General Description. Features. Applications. AtlasIED.com. HPA4202 Front. 1/5 HPA4202 2-Channel High Power Multi-Impedance Amplifier Features 70.7V/100V and 2Ω, 4Ω, and 8Ω Output 100V 70.7V 8Ω 2 x 1200W 4Ω 2Ω 2 x 2500W 8Ω BRIDGED 1 x 3800W 4Ω BRIDGED 1 x 4800W Balanced Inputs

More information

PS 230 DUAL CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0

PS 230 DUAL CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0 PS 230 DUAL CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION User Manual January 2017 V1.0 Table of contents 1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 3 2.0 INSTALLATION... 4 3.0 FRONTPANEL CONTROLS & CONNECTORS... 4 4.0 SIDE PANEL CONNECTORS...

More information

AI531 Analog Input Module

AI531 Analog Input Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET AI531 Analog Input Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 250 600 R0001 AI531, analog input module, 8 AI, U/I/Pt100, TC, 15 bits + sign, 4-wires

More information

IGLOO IGLOO EASY INSTRUCTION MANUAL

IGLOO IGLOO EASY INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISH EASY C695 C698 INSTRUCTION MANUAL PRELIMINARY Congratulations on choosing a Clay Paky product! We thank you for your custom. Please note that this product, as all the others in the rich Clay Paky

More information

Professional Entertainment Technology. imove 50SR. Innovation, Quality, Performance 21-

Professional Entertainment Technology. imove 50SR. Innovation, Quality, Performance 21- Innovation, Quality, Performance 21- imove 50SR User Guide Professional Entertainment Technology EC Declaration of Conformity We declare that our products (lighting equipments) comply with the following

More information

DC541 Digital Input/Output Module

DC541 Digital Input/Output Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET DC541 Digital Input/Output Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 270 000 R0001 1SAP 470 000 R0001 DC541-CM, digital input/output module,

More information

PDD-300 pulsed diode driver

PDD-300 pulsed diode driver rev 1.08 / 2019 02 13 PDD-300 pulsed diode driver User manual Warning! This equipment may be dangerous. Please read user manual before starting operations. Important note. Please measure output with adequate

More information

CM597 Ethernet Communication Module

CM597 Ethernet Communication Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CM597 Ethernet Communication Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 173 700 R0001 1SAP 373 700 R0001 CM597-ETH, communication module Ethernet

More information

300 WATT, PFC, OPEN FRAME POWER SUPPLIES TABLE 1. OUTPUT RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, RMW 300W SERIES

300 WATT, PFC, OPEN FRAME POWER SUPPLIES TABLE 1. OUTPUT RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, RMW 300W SERIES INSTRUCTION MANUAL KEPCO An ISO 9001 Company. 300 WATT, PFC, OPEN FRAME POWER SUPPLIES RMW 300W SERIES I INTRODUCTION SCOPE OF MANUAL. This instruction manual covers the installation and operation of the

More information

DC522 Digital Input/Output Module

DC522 Digital Input/Output Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET DC522 Digital Input/Output Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 240 600 R0001 1SAP 440 600 R0001 DC522, digital input/output module, 16

More information

CliQ II DC-UPS Module 24V 40A / DRU-24V40ABN

CliQ II DC-UPS Module 24V 40A / DRU-24V40ABN Highlights & Features Full corrosion resistant Aluminium chassis Suitable for 24V system up to 40A Built-in diagnostic monitoring for DC OK, Discharge and Battery Fail by relay contacts LED indicator for

More information

AX522 Analog Input/Output Module

AX522 Analog Input/Output Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET AX522 Analog Input/Output Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 250 000 R0001 1SAP 450 000 R0001 AX522, analog input/output module, 8 AI

More information

AC-DC POWER SUPPLIES UNIVERSAL INPUT, 65 WATT MEDICAL APPLICATIONS MUI65 SERIES

AC-DC POWER SUPPLIES UNIVERSAL INPUT, 65 WATT MEDICAL APPLICATIONS MUI65 SERIES AC-DC POWER SUPPLIES UNIVERSAL INPUT, 65 WATT MEDICAL APPLICATIONS 2MOPP Medical FEATURES Universal Input Range Operating Temperature Range: -25º to 80ºC (with derating) Compact Package: 2.00 3.00 1.16

More information

Industrial Power Supplies

Industrial Power Supplies 50-600 Watt Features Switch mode power supplies for DIN-rail mounting 6 power ranges with 2, 3, 6, 12, 20 and 24 A output current (24 VDC models) Selectable 115/ 230 VAC input Very low ripple and noise

More information

DS-1H05 Ethernet-over-Coax Extender. User Manual

DS-1H05 Ethernet-over-Coax Extender. User Manual DS-1H05 Ethernet-over-Coax Extender User Manual Thank you for purchasing our product. If there is any question or request, please do not hesitate to contact dealer. This manual is applicable to DS-1H05-T,

More information

ArmorPoint I/O Field Potential Distributor, Series A

ArmorPoint I/O Field Potential Distributor, Series A Installation Instructions ArmorPoint I/O Field Potential Distributor, Series A (Cat. No. 1738-FPD) The field potential distributor (Cat. no. 1738-FPD) lets you change the field power distribution source

More information

BS 287 DUAL CHANNEL POWER SUPPLY. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0

BS 287 DUAL CHANNEL POWER SUPPLY. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0 BS 287 DUAL CHANNEL POWER SUPPLY User Manual January 2017 V1.0 Table of contents 1.0 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS... 3 2.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION PS 289... 4 3.0 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION... 5 4.0 MAINS POWER & SAFETY

More information

Industrial Serial RS-232 to Fiber Converter. KSC-200 Series. Installation Guide

Industrial Serial RS-232 to Fiber Converter. KSC-200 Series. Installation Guide Industrial Serial RS-232 to Fiber Converter KSC-200 Series Installation Guide DOC.100803-KSC-200-1- (C) 2006 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any

More information

C4-TOP Manual (3.0E)

C4-TOP Manual (3.0E) C4-TOP Manual (3.0E) References in the manual WARNING! CAUTION! IMPORTANT! This refers to a potentially dangerous situation which may lead to personal injury. This refers to a potentially dangerous situation

More information

Note1: Typ. efficiency is 230VAC and full load 12VDC 24VDC 48VDC ms 8ms 16ms 80ms

Note1: Typ. efficiency is 230VAC and full load 12VDC 24VDC 48VDC ms 8ms 16ms 80ms Features Regulated Converters Universal Input 9-264V Efficiency Up To 86% Short Circuit And Over Voltage/Current Protected UL/EN695 Certified, CE Marked Conformal Coated Product RECOM Connector Set Available

More information

Safety Standards. Model Number:

Safety Standards. Model Number: 040APS15 B Highlights & Features Safety Approvals to IEC 60601-1 3.1rd ed. & IEC 60950-1 Compliant with IEC 60601-1-2 4th Ed. Requirements Low touch current (

More information

PS 289 DUAL CHANNEL POWER SUPPLY USER MANUAL

PS 289 DUAL CHANNEL POWER SUPPLY USER MANUAL PS 289 DUAL CHANNEL POWER SUPPLY USER MANUAL August 2016 This product is designed and manufactured by: ASL Intercom B.V. Zonnebaan 42 3542 EG Utrecht The Netherlands Phone: +31 (0)30 2411901 Fax: + 31

More information

CI504 PROFINET Communication Interface Module

CI504 PROFINET Communication Interface Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CI504 PROFINET Communication Interface Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 221 300 R0001 1SAP 421 300 R0001 CI504-PNIO, PROFINET Bus Module

More information

VEL05 Series. xxx Series. 5 Watt. AC-DC Power Supplies. Models & Ratings. Input

VEL05 Series. xxx Series. 5 Watt.  AC-DC Power Supplies. Models & Ratings. Input 5 Watt xxx Series Energy Efficiency Level VI Barrel Jack & USB Versions Fixed Mains Connectors Universal Input Output Voltages from 5.0 V to 12.0 V Class II Construction Low Cost B R A N D The VEL05 series

More information

AX521 Analog Input/Output Module

AX521 Analog Input/Output Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET AX521 Analog Input/Output Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 250 100 R0001 1SAP 450 100 R0001 AX521, analog input/output module, 4 AI,

More information

CM592 PROFIBUS Communication Module

CM592 PROFIBUS Communication Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CM592 PROFIBUS Communication Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 173 200 R0001 1SAP 373 200 R0001 CM592-DP, communication module PROFIBUS

More information

CM579-PNIO PROFINET Communication Module

CM579-PNIO PROFINET Communication Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CM579-PNIO PROFINET Communication Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 170 901 R0101 1SAP 370 901 R0101 CM579-PNIO, PROFINET communication

More information

SCHOTT FLM 4 Fiber Lighting Modul. Operating Instructions

SCHOTT FLM 4 Fiber Lighting Modul. Operating Instructions SCHOTT FLM 4 Fiber Lighting Modul Operating Instructions Contents 1. Important information 3 2. Scope of Delivery 3 3. Intended use 3 4. Safety information 4 5. Operation 5 5.1. LED Optics Module 5 5.2.

More information

TRC-190 User s Manual

TRC-190 User s Manual First Edition, November 2008 www.moxa.com/product 2008 Moxa Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction without permission is prohibited. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement

More information

MC 11 EB-2 Power supply cabinet with external bus, AC version

MC 11 EB-2 Power supply cabinet with external bus, AC version MC 11 EB-2 Power supply cabinet with external bus, AC version USER/MAINTENANCE MANUAL 1 SLOT 0 SLOT 1 SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5 SLOT 6 SLOT 7 SLOT 8 SLOT 9 SLOT 10 SLOT 11 EB-2 (a) MC11 (b) (c) Figures

More information

48V 2KW 1U AC-DC Power Supply PS Electrical Specification for: Telkoor Model:

48V 2KW 1U AC-DC Power Supply PS Electrical Specification for: Telkoor Model: Electrical Specification for: Telkoor Model: 48V 2KW 1U AC-DC Power Supply PS-2048 SCALE RELEASE DATE 26/06/11 SHEET 1 OF 11 REVISION HISTORY Rev Level Rev Date Change Made Reason for Change Effective

More information

Universal Power Supplies

Universal Power Supplies , Features Universal input: 90 264 VAC or 120 30 VDC Active power factor correction (>0.95) High efficiency up to 93% Load share function for up to 3 units in parallel Adjustable output voltage EMI/EMC

More information

AUD-220 Installation Guide

AUD-220 Installation Guide AUD-220 Installation Guide STEREO MONO BRIDGE IR RS232 TX RX MIC 48V LINE L R MIC 1 2 INPUTS 24V DC 1 x 40W @ 8Ω 2 x 20W @ 4Ω LOOP OUTPUTS The Intelix AUD-220 is a 2x20 watt Class D amplifier with 8Ω speaker

More information

AUD-340 Installation Guide

AUD-340 Installation Guide F0123456789ABC DE AUD-340 Installation Guide INPUTS CONTROL OUTPUT 24V DC 48V LINE 2 AUDIO IR RS232 COM 70V 100V 1 3 DIGITAL L R AUDIO 2.5A MAX TX RX 1 2 3 INPUT SELECT LINE BASS TREBLE MUTE 1 Safety Precautions

More information

CD522 Encoder, Counter and PWM Module

CD522 Encoder, Counter and PWM Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CD522 Encoder, Counter and PWM Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 260 300 R0001 1SAP 460 300 R0001 CD522, encoder & PWM module, 2 encoder

More information

PS 430 FOUR CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0

PS 430 FOUR CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0 PS 430 FOUR CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION User Manual January 2017 V1.0 Table of contents 1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 3 2.0 INSTALLATION... 4 3.0 FRONTPANEL CONTROLS & CONNECTORS... 4 4.0 SIDE PANEL CONNECTORS...

More information

ABB Drives. User s Manual I/O Module Adapter AIMA-01

ABB Drives. User s Manual I/O Module Adapter AIMA-01 ABB Drives User s Manual I/O Module Adapter AIMA-01 I/O Module Adapter AIMA-01 User s Manual 3AFE 64661442 REV A EN EFFECTIVE: 1.12.2003 2003 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. 5 Safety instructions Overview

More information

Legacy Serial. Legacy Serial Redundant Ring Ethernet Extender DDW-222. High Speed Ethernet extension over copper. Configuration and diagnostics

Legacy Serial. Legacy Serial Redundant Ring Ethernet Extender DDW-222. High Speed Ethernet extension over copper. Configuration and diagnostics Redundant Ring Ethernet Extender High Speed Ethernet extension over copper The is an Industrial Ethernet SH extender with support for redundant rings. The redundant protocol can be used either on the SH

More information

Industrial Power Supplies

Industrial Power Supplies 75-600 Watt Features Switch mode power supplies for DIN-rail mounting 4 power ranges with 3, 6, 12 and 24 A output current (24 VDC models) Selectable 115/ 230 VAC input Very low ripple and noise EMI complies

More information

040APS12 B MDS. MDS Medical AC-DC Open Frame 12Volt, 40Watt / MDS-040APS12 B ``` Highlights & Features. Safety Standards.

040APS12 B MDS. MDS Medical AC-DC Open Frame 12Volt, 40Watt / MDS-040APS12 B ``` Highlights & Features. Safety Standards. 040APS12 B Highlights & Features Safety Approvals to IEC 60601-1 3rd ed. & IEC 60950-1 Risk management report available Low touch current (

More information

Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports. Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-P. Installation Guide

Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports. Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-P. Installation Guide Industrial 5-Port Fast Ethernet Switches with SFP Slot and optional 4 PoE PSE Ports Basic Model: KSD-541 PoE Model: KSD-541-P Installation Guide DOC.080104-1- (C) 2008 KTI Networks Inc. All rights reserved.

More information

LED PANEL. User Manual Please read the instructions carefully before use LED-7TC. Innovation, Quality, Performance 15-

LED PANEL. User Manual Please read the instructions carefully before use LED-7TC. Innovation, Quality, Performance 15- LED PANEL LED-7TC Innovation, Quality, Performance User Manual Please read the instructions carefully before use 15- 9. Fixture Cleaning TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Safety Instructions 2. Technical Specifications

More information

Quick Start Guide. Installation. User s Manual 1

Quick Start Guide. Installation.  User s Manual 1 Quick Start Guide This quick start guide describes how to install and use the Hardened Ethernet Extender. This is the Hardened Ethernet Extender of choice for harsh environments constrained by space. Installation

More information

DXF-200 DVI/HDMI Optical Extension System

DXF-200 DVI/HDMI Optical Extension System DXF-200 DVI/HDMI Optical Extension System User s Manual M916-9900-102 17 February 2010 Miranda Technologies Inc. 3499 Douglas-B.-Floreani St-Laurent, Québec, Canada H4S 1Y6 Tel. 514-333-1772 Fax. 514-333-9828

More information

PS 630 SIX CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0

PS 630 SIX CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION. User Manual. January 2017 V1.0 PS 630 SIX CHANNEL REMOTE SPEAKER STATION User Manual January 2017 V1.0 Table of contents 1.0 GENERAL DESCRIPTION... 3 2.0 INSTALLATION... 4 3.0 FRONTPANEL CONTROLS & CONNECTORS... 4 4.0 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS...

More information

Site~Rite Prevue Ultrasound System and Site~Rite Prevue+ Ultrasound System Technical Manual

Site~Rite Prevue Ultrasound System and Site~Rite Prevue+ Ultrasound System Technical Manual Site~Rite Prevue Ultrasound System and Site~Rite Prevue+ Ultrasound System Technical Manual 9770088 System Technical Manual 3 Table of Contents Section 1 Statement of Purpose 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 System Overview

More information

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page xvii Safety Warnings, page xvii Safety Guidelines, page xx

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page xvii Safety Warnings, page xvii Safety Guidelines, page xx Preface Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page xvii Safety s, page xvii Safety Guidelines, page xx Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For information on obtaining

More information

Output Voltage* (nom.)(adjustable)

Output Voltage* (nom.)(adjustable) Industrial Power Supplies TBLC Series, 6 90 W Low profile case, module depth only 55 mm Suitable for mounting in domestic installation panels Very high efficiency and low standby power -> compliance to

More information

Safety Standards. Model Number:

Safety Standards. Model Number: 040APS Highlights & Features Compliant to IEC 60601-1 3rd edition IT and medical safety approvals Low earth leakage Current (

More information

MINI-PS AC/10-15DC/8

MINI-PS AC/10-15DC/8 Primary-Switched Power Supply, Narrow Design Data Sheet 08/2004 MINI POWER provides: An extra narrow design, with widths of 22.5 mm, 45 mm, and 67.5 mm (0.886, 1.772, and 2.657 in.) Global use due to a

More information

CM589 PROFINET Communication Module

CM589 PROFINET Communication Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CM589 PROFINET Communication Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 172 900 R0011 1SAP 372 900 R0011 1SAP 172 900 R0111 1SAP 372 900 R0111

More information

Features. Regulated Converter. RAC35-G/OF 35 Watt 4 x 2 Open Frame RAC35- SG/OF. AC/DC Converter

Features. Regulated Converter. RAC35-G/OF 35 Watt 4 x 2 Open Frame RAC35- SG/OF. AC/DC Converter Features Regulated Converter Description Universal input -264VAC Efficiency up to 86% Short circuit and over voltage/current protected UL/EN9 certified, CE marked Conformal coated product The RAC35-xxG/OF

More information

LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50. User. Guide. Professional Entertainment Technology

LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50. User. Guide. Professional Entertainment Technology LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50 Guide User Professional Entertainment Technology TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Safety Instruction 2. Technical Specification 3. How To Set The Unit 4. How To Control The Unit 5. Troubleshooting

More information

Professional Entertainment Technology LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50. Innovation, Quality, Performance 23-

Professional Entertainment Technology LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50. Innovation, Quality, Performance 23- Innovation, Quality, Performance 23- LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50 User Guide Professional Entertainment Technology EC Declaration of Conformity We declare that our products (lighting equipments) comply with the

More information

XPress-Pro SW Series Hardened Ethernet Switches Enabling Communication for the Demanding Industrial Environment

XPress-Pro SW Series Hardened Ethernet Switches Enabling Communication for the Demanding Industrial Environment XPress-Pro SW Series Hardened Ethernet Switches Enabling Communication for the Demanding Industrial Environment Part of the DeviceLinx family of networkenablement products, XPress-Pro SW series managed

More information

TECHNICAL DATASHEET MDS Medical AC-DC Open Frame 065APS24 B Highlights & Features Safety Standards Model Number: Unit Weight Dimensions (W x L x H):

TECHNICAL DATASHEET MDS Medical AC-DC Open Frame 065APS24 B Highlights & Features Safety Standards Model Number: Unit Weight Dimensions (W x L x H): 065APS24 B Highlights & Features Safety Approvals to IEC 60601-1 3rd ed. & IEC 60950-1 Risk management report available Low touch current (

More information

CI542 PROFIBUS Communication Interface Module

CI542 PROFIBUS Communication Interface Module Ordering Data DATA SHEET CI542 PROFIBUS Communication Interface Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 224 200 R0001 1SAP 424 200 R0001 CI542-DP, PROFIBUS DP bus module,

More information

100BPS15 B. MDS Medical AC-DC Open Frame 15Volt, 100Watt / MDS-100BPS15 B ``` Highlights & Features. Safety Standards.

100BPS15 B. MDS Medical AC-DC Open Frame 15Volt, 100Watt / MDS-100BPS15 B ``` Highlights & Features. Safety Standards. TECHNICAL DATASHEET 100BPS15 B Highlights & Features rd rd Safety Approvals to IEC60601-1 3 & 3.1 and IEC60950-1 Compact size 2 x4 Class B EMI and 4th Edition Immunity Compliant Low touch current (

More information

DATASHEET. Ultra Capacitor Charger, UCC-4

DATASHEET. Ultra Capacitor Charger, UCC-4 DATASHEET Ultra Capacitor Charger, UCC-4 Easy installation Monitoring and surveillance of operation Balancing to save energy 90-450 V DC 3.5A Output Modular Ultra Capacitor system Document no.: 4921260003

More information

DC532-XC, digital input/output module,

DC532-XC, digital input/output module, Ordering Data DATA SHEET DC532 Digital Input/Output Module 1 Ordering Data Part No. Description Product Life Cycle Phase *) 1SAP 240 100 R0001 1SAP 440 100 R0001 DC532, digital input/output module, 16

More information

Professional Entertainment Technology LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50. User. Guide

Professional Entertainment Technology LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50. User. Guide Professional Entertainment Technology LED BEAM 300 LED-MB50 Guide User 1- 1. Safety Instruction WARNING Please read carefully the instruction, which includes important information about the installation,

More information

Druck DPI 620 advanced modular calibrator

Druck DPI 620 advanced modular calibrator GE Sensing & Inspection Technologies A1.1 DPI 620: Channel 1 (CH1) Druck DPI 620 advanced modular calibrator safety and quick reference guide - K0454 Measure (M) / Source (S) / Power (P) a ±30 V (M) b

More information

Safety Standards. Model Number:

Safety Standards. Model Number: PMC Highlights & Features Universal AC input range from 85Vac to 264Vac without power de-rating Full Aluminum casing for light weight and corrosion resistant handling High MTBF > 700,000 hrs. as per Telcordia

More information

Enclosed Power Supplies

Enclosed Power Supplies , 15 150 Watt Features Very compact metal cased power supplies High operating temperature up to 70 C Low no load power consumption

More information